LMV26.300A2: Basic Documentation

LMV26 AGM60
LMV26.300A2
Basic unit for intermittent operation, with integrated fuel-
air ratio control for forced draft burners
LMV36.300A2
Basic unit for continuous operation and intermittent
operation, with integrated fuel-air ratio control for forced
draft burners
AGM60
Switch unit for switching the valve control or feedback
signals of both fuels
Basic Documentation
The LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60 and this Basic Documentation are intended for OEMs which integrate the units
in their products!
Software version
V03.70
CC1P7547en
17.12.2018 Building Technologies
Supplementary documentation
User Documentation Modbus AZL2 ........................................................................ A7541
Environmental Product Declaration LMV2 / LMV3 .................................................. E7541
Environmental Product Declaration AGM60 ........................................................... E7547
Installation and Operating Instructions PC Software ACS410 ................................. J7352
Data Sheet LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60 .................................................................... N7547
Product Range Overview LMV2 / LMV3 ................................................................. Q7541
2/283
Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

17.12.2018
Contents
1 Safety notes ................................................................................................... 9
1.1 Warning notes ................................................................................................. 9
1.2 Mounting notes .............................................................................................. 11
1.2.1 LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................................................................. 11
1.2.2 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 12
1.3 Installation notes............................................................................................ 13
1.3.1 Use of the AGM60 ......................................................................................... 14
1.4 Electrical connections of LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60 ................................. 14
1.4.1 LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................................................................. 14
1.4.2 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 15
1.5 Connection BC interface via integrated RJ11 jack (X56) .............................. 16
1.6 Electrical connection of flame detectors ........................................................ 17
1.7 Commissioning notes .................................................................................... 17
1.8 Notes on settings and parameter settings ..................................................... 19
1.9 Standards and certificates ............................................................................. 20
1.10 Service notes ................................................................................................. 21
1.11 Life cycle........................................................................................................ 21
1.12 Disposal notes ............................................................................................... 21
2 System structure/function description...................................................... 22

2.1 LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................................................................. 22
2.2 For Europe..................................................................................................... 23
2.3 General information ....................................................................................... 23
2.4 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 24
2.4.1 Electrical connections of fuel actuators ......................................................... 24
2.4.2 Continuous operation .................................................................................... 25
2.4.3 Fuel changeover ............................................................................................ 25
2.4.4 Extra fuel selector .......................................................................................... 25
3 Type summary ............................................................................................. 26

3.1 LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................................................................. 26
3.2 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 26
3.3 Fuel selector .................................................................................................. 26
4 Technical data.............................................................................................. 27

4.1 LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit............................................................................. 27
4.1.1 Terminal loading Inputs ................................................................................. 27
4.1.2 Terminal loading Outputs .............................................................................. 28
4.1.3 Analog output / load output X74 pin 3 ........................................................... 28
4.1.4 Cable lengths................................................................................................. 29
4.1.5 Cross-sectional areas .................................................................................... 29
4.1.6 Connections of actuators ............................................................................... 29
4.2 Signal cable AGV50 from AZL2  BC interface ........................................... 30
4.3 Environmental conditions .............................................................................. 30
4.4 Flame detectors ............................................................................................. 31
3/283

Contents 17.12.2018
4.4.1 Ionization probe .............................................................................................31
4.4.2 UV flame detectors QRA2 / QRA4 / QRA10 ..................................................33
4.4.3 Photoresistive flame detectors QRB1 / QRB3 ...............................................34
4.4.4 Yellow flame detector QRB4 ..........................................................................35
4.4.5 Blue-flame detectors QRC .............................................................................36
4.5 Switch unit AGM60 ........................................................................................37
4.5.1 Terminal output Inputs ...................................................................................38
4.5.2 Terminal output Outputs ................................................................................38
4.5.3 Cable lengths .................................................................................................39
4.5.4 Cross-sectional areas ....................................................................................39
4.5.5 Electrical connections of actuators ................................................................39
4.5.6 Environmental conditions ...............................................................................39
5 Dimensions...................................................................................................40
5.1 LMV26 / LMV36 .............................................................................................40
5.2 AGM60 ...........................................................................................................41
6 Display and diagnostics ..............................................................................41
7 Basic unit LMV26 / LMV36...........................................................................42

7.1 Description of inputs and outputs...................................................................42
7.2 Flame detectors .............................................................................................43
7.2.1 Loss of flame..................................................................................................44
7.2.2 Extraneous light .............................................................................................44
7.2.3 No flame at the end of safety time .................................................................44
7.2.4 Flame intensity ...............................................................................................45
7.2.5 Supervision of flame detector ........................................................................45
7.2.6 Flame detection sensitivity .............................................................................45
7.3 Digital inputs ..................................................................................................46
7.3.1 Safety loop X3–04 (optional pressure switch-max), pin 1 and 2 ....................46
7.3.2 Burner flange X3–03, pin 1 and 2 ..................................................................47
7.3.3 Input for external load controller (ON / OFF) X5–03, pin 1 ............................47
7.3.4 Inputs X5-03 pin 2 and 3 (Open / Close or stage 2 / stage 3)........................47
7.3.5 Air pressure switch X3–02 .............................................................................48
7.3.6 Gas pressure switch for valve proving ...........................................................49
7.3.7 Gas pressure switch-min / oil pressure switch-min, start release gas X5–01 50
7.3.8 Setting the time for checking the pressure switch..........................................52
7.3.9 Gas / oil pressure switch-max / or POC contact, start release oil / additional
speed-dependent air pressure switch X5–02.................................................53
7.3.10 Fuel selection / reset / lockout .......................................................................57
7.4 Digital outputs ................................................................................................59
7.4.1 Output alarm type No-SI X3–05, pin 2 ...........................................................59
7.4.2 Fan motor contactor type SI – X3–05, pin 1 ..................................................59
7.4.3 Continuous fan operation – X3–05, pin 3.......................................................59
7.4.4 Output ignition type SI (IGNITION) X4–02 .....................................................60
7.4.5 Outputs fuel valves type SI V1 / V2 / V3 / PV X8–02, X7-01, X7-02..............61
7.4.6 Output safety valve type SI X6–03 / magnetic clutch.....................................64
7.4.7 Output for indication of operation X8-04 pin 2 ...............................................64
7.5 Program sequence.........................................................................................65
7.5.1 Time parameters ............................................................................................65
4/283

17.12.201816
7.5.2 Valve proving ................................................................................................. 67
7.5.2.1. Valve proving with separate pressure switch X5-02 ...................................... 69
7.5.2.2. Valve proving via the pressure switch-min gas X5-01 ................................... 70
7.5.2.3. Lockout phase (phase 00) ............................................................................. 71
7.5.2.4. Safety phase (phase 02) ............................................................................... 71
7.5.3 Special functions during the program sequence ........................................... 71
7.5.3.1. Reset / manual lockout .................................................................................. 71
7.5.3.2. Alarm upon prevention of startup .................................................................. 73
7.5.3.3. Possible preventions of startup ..................................................................... 74
7.5.3.4. Repetition counter ......................................................................................... 75
7.5.3.5. Start without prepurging (as per EN 676) ...................................................... 77
7.5.3.6. Gas shortage program................................................................................... 78
7.5.3.7. Program stop function ................................................................................... 79
7.5.3.9. Low-fire shutdown ......................................................................................... 80
7.5.3.10. Continuous fan .............................................................................................. 80
7.5.3.11. Test function for burner approval – loss-of-flame test (TÜV test) .................. 81
7.5.3.12. Postpurging in the lockout position ................................................................ 82
7.6 Fuel trains (application examples) ................................................................. 83
7.7 Sequence diagrams....................................................................................... 89
7.7.1 Gas direct ignition «G», «G mod», «G mod pneu» ....................................... 90
7.7.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 «Gp1», «Gp1 mod», «Gp1 mod pneu»........................... 91
7.7.3 Gas pilot ignition 2 «Gp2», «Gp2 mod», «Gp2 mod pneu»........................... 92
7.7.4 Light oil direct ignition «Lo», «Lo mod», «Lo 2-stage», «Lo 3-stage» ........... 93
7.7.5 Light oil pilot ignition «LoGp» «LoGp mod» «LoGp 2 stage» ........................ 94
7.7.6 Legend to the sequence diagrams ................................................................ 95
8 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 98

8.1 LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and one fuel actuator ..................................... 98
8.2 LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and two fuel actuators .................................... 98
8.3 Connecting cable between AGM60 and LMV26 / LMV36 (AGV60.50 cable) 99
9 Selection of operating mode .................................................................... 100

9.1 Deleting curves ............................................................................................ 103
10 Connection to load controllers ................................................................ 104

10.1 Load controller-on contact X5-03, pin 1....................................................... 104
10.2 External load controller via contacts X5-03, pin 2 / pin 3............................. 104
10.3 Default output via building automation – X92 .............................................. 106
10.4 Manual output .............................................................................................. 108
10.5 Output with curve settings ........................................................................... 108
10.6 External load controller via analog input X64 pin 1 / X64 pin 2 ................... 109
10.6.1 Switching thresholds for modulating operation ............................................ 109
10.6.2 Switching thresholds for multistage operation ............................................. 109
10.7 Prioritization of load controller sources........................................................ 110
10.7.1 Emergency operation with several load controller sources ......................... 111
10.7.2 Manual control ............................................................................................. 111
11 Electronic fuel-air ratio control ................................................................ 112

11.1 General ........................................................................................................ 112
5/283

Contents 17.12.2018
11.2 Behavior outside the operating positions .....................................................112
11.2.1 Traveling speed ...........................................................................................112
11.2.2 Home position ..............................................................................................112
11.2.3 Prepurging ...................................................................................................113
11.2.4 Ignition .........................................................................................................113
11.2.5 Postpurging ..................................................................................................113
11.3 Modulating operation ...................................................................................113
11.3.1 Definition of curves ......................................................................................114
11.3.2 Traveling speed / maximum curve slope .....................................................115
11.3.3 Entering the running position .......................................................................116
11.3.4 Operating position ........................................................................................116
11.3.5 Limitation of modulation range .....................................................................117
11.3.6 Setting the minimum and maximum output..................................................118
11.4 Multistage operation.....................................................................................119
11.4.1 Definition of curves ......................................................................................119
11.4.2 Traveling speed ...........................................................................................119
11.4.3 Adjustment of output ....................................................................................120
11.4.4 Entering the operating position ....................................................................120
11.4.5 Operating position ........................................................................................120
11.4.6 Limitation of modulation range .....................................................................121
11.5 End of operating position .............................................................................121
11.6 Notes on settings and parameter settings ...................................................122
12 Actuators X53 / X54 ...................................................................................123

12.1 Function principle .........................................................................................123
12.2 Definition of angles ......................................................................................123
12.3 Referencing..................................................................................................124
12.3.1 Reference run ..............................................................................................126
12.4 Direction of rotation ......................................................................................128
12.5 Monitoring the actuator positions .................................................................129
12.6 Changing the error detection band for monitoring the actuator positions ....131
12.7 Forced travel ................................................................................................131
12.8 Detection of line interruptions ......................................................................131
12.9 Protection against mixup..............................................................................132
12.9.1 Proposal for implementation ........................................................................132
13 Fan control .................................................................................................133

13.1 Function principle .........................................................................................133
13.2 Activation of VSD / PWM fan .......................................................................133
13.3 VSD control X74 pin 3..................................................................................134
13.4 PWM fan control X64 pin 3 ..........................................................................134
13.5 Safe separation of mains voltage and protective extra low-voltage .............135
13.6 Ramp time....................................................................................................136
13.7 Acquisition of speed .....................................................................................137
13.7.1 Acquisition of speed with proximity switch ...................................................137
13.7.2 Acquisition of speed with Hall generator ......................................................138
13.7.3 Forced travel fan ..........................................................................................139
6/283

17.12.201816
13.8 Speed control .............................................................................................. 139
13.9 Speed supervision ....................................................................................... 140
13.9.1 Extended speed supervision ....................................................................... 141
13.10 Setting the parameters of the VSD .............................................................. 142
13.11 Standardization of speed ............................................................................. 143
13.12 Control of fan motor with pneumatic fuel-air ratio control ............................ 147
13.13 EMC of LMV26 / LMV36 and VSD .............................................................. 147
13.14 Special conditions for PWM fan in electronic ratio control system .............. 148
13.16 Description of connection terminals............................................................. 157
13.16.1 VSD ............................................................................................................. 157
13.16.2 PWM fan ...................................................................................................... 157
14 Load output X74 pin 3 ............................................................................... 158

14.1 Safe separation of mains voltage and extra low-voltage ............................ 158
14.2 Modulating operation ................................................................................... 159
14.3 2-stage operation......................................................................................... 159
14.4 3-stage operation......................................................................................... 159
15 Fuel meter input X75 pin 1 / X75 pin 2 ..................................................... 160
15.1 Configuration of fuel meter .......................................................................... 160
15.1.1 Types of fuel meters .................................................................................... 160
15.1.2 Configuration of pulses per volume unit ...................................................... 160
15.1.3 Reading and resetting the meter readings .................................................. 160
15.2 Fuel throughput ........................................................................................... 161
15.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................... 161
15.2.2 Reading out the fuel throughput .................................................................. 161
16 Connection and internal diagram ............................................................ 162

16.1 Application example: Gas / biogas burners ................................................. 164
16.1.1 Connection and internal diagram for gas / biogas burners .......................... 164
16.1.2 Parameter setting ........................................................................................ 165
17 Special feature: Burner identification...................................................... 165
18 Connection to superposed systems........................................................ 166

18.1 General information and building automation functions .............................. 166
18.2 Modbus ........................................................................................................ 168
19 PC software ACS410 ................................................................................. 169
20 Error history ............................................................................................... 170

20.1 Error classes................................................................................................ 170
20.2 Makeup of error history................................................................................ 171
21 Lifecycle function ...................................................................................... 172
22 Safety notes on use of the AZL2 .............................................................. 172
23 Operating via AZL2.................................................................................... 173
24 Operation of LMV26 / LMV36 via the AZL2.............................................. 181
7/283

Contents 17.12.2018
29 Parameter list LMV26/ LMV36 ...................................................................235
30 Error code list (all LMV2 types / LMV3 types)............................................256
31 Revision history of LMV26 / LMV36 .........................................................274
32 List of figures .............................................................................................280
8/283

17.12.201816
1 Safety notes
1.1 Warning notes
To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following
warning notes must be observed!
LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60 switch unit are safety devices! Do not open, interfere
with or modify the units. Siemens does not assume responsibility for damage
resulting from unauthorized interference!
Additional safety notes contained in other chapters of this document must be

observed as well!
After commissioning and after each service visit, check the flue gas values
across the entire output range!
The present Basic Documentation describes a wide choice of applications and functions
and shall serve as a guideline. The correct functioning of the units must be checked and
proven by function checks on a test rig or on the plant itself!
 All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by
qualified personnel
 Degree of protection IP40 as per DIN EN 60529 for the basic unit must be ensured
through adequate mounting of the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit and the AGM60
switch unit by the burner or boiler manufacturer
 Before making any wiring changes in the connection area, completely isolate the
plant from mains supply (all-polar disconnection). Ensure that the plant cannot be
inadvertently switched on and that it is indeed dead. If not disconnected, there is a
risk of electric shock hazard
 Protection against electric shock hazard on the LMV26 / LMV36, the AGM60 and on
all connected electrical components must be ensured through adequate mounting.
In terms of design, stability and protection, the cover used must conform to EN
60730
 After each activity (mounting, installation and service work, etc.), check to ensure
that wiring is in an orderly state and that the parameters are correctly set
 Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such units must not be put
into operation even if they do not exhibit any damage
 When programming the air-fuel ratio control curves, the commissioning engineer
must constantly watch the quality of the combustion process (e.g. by means of a
flue gas analyzer) and, in the event of poor combustion values or dangerous
conditions, take appropriate actions, e.g. by shutting down the LMV26 / LMV36
manually
 When starting up a dual-fuel burner, both fuel trains must be put into full operation,
thus making certain that fuel changeover by the user cannot lead to critical
conditions
 The inputs and outputs of the AGM60 may only be used for the application covered
by this document and only in connection with the sensors and actuators specified
for the application, the reason being that only these have been checked and
released in terms of error effects. If you want to use the sensors and actuators on
other applications, please contact Siemens
 The following plug-on terminations carry FELV (functional extra low-voltage) (also
refer to chapter Electrical connection of LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60), thus
ensuring adequate separation from mains voltage:
- BCI (X56) for the connecting cable of AZL2 or PC software ACS410
- COM (X92) for accessories, such as the OCI410
- Plug-on terminations for actuators (X54) or for the AGV60.50 connecting cable
when using 2 fuel actuators via AGM60
These plug-on terminations may be disconnected or exchanged only when the plant
is dead (all-polar disconnection)
 When setting up a system with the AGM60, check to ensure that the sensors and
actuators are correctly assigned to fuels
9/283

1 Safety notes 17.12.2018
 The plugs of the connecting cables for the LMV26 / LMV36 or other accessories,
such as the OCI410 interface (plugged into the BCI), may be removed or
exchanged only when the plant is shut down (all-polar disconnection), since the BCI
does not provide safe separation from mains voltage.
 The connection for the SQM3 or SQN1 actuators does not provide safe separation
from mains voltage. Prior to connecting or changing one of these actuators, the
plant must be shut down (all-polar disconnection)
 When setting up a system with the AGM60, check to ensure that the sensors and
actuators are correctly assigned to fuels
To ensure safety and reliability of the LMV26 / LMV36 and the AGM60, the following
points must also be observed:
 Condensation and ingress of humidity must be avoided. Should such conditions
occur, make sure that the unit is completed dry before switching on again!
 Static charges must be avoided since they can damage the unit’s electronic
components when touched.
Recommendation: Use ESD equipment
 If the unit fuse was blown due to overload or a short-circuit at the connection
terminals, the LMV26 / LMV36 must be replaced since the switching contacts could
have been damaged
 If error codes 95…98 appear during operation, this may be an indication of contact
problems and the LMV26 / LMV36 should be replaced
10/283

1.2 Mounting notes
 Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations and regulations relating to
standards are complied with
 In geographical areas where DIN regulations apply, the requirements of VDE must
be satisfied, especially DIN / VDE 0100, 0550 and DIN / VDE 0722
1.2.1 LMV26 / LMV36
 The LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit must be secured with fixing screws M4 (UNC32) or
M5 (UNC24), observing a maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm and using all 4
fixing points. Additional mounting surfaces on the housing are provided to improve
mechanical stability. These must completely rest on the mounting surface to which
the unit is secured. The flatness of that mounting surface must be within a tolerance
band of 0.3 mm
 Touch protection of the external fuel selector must be ensured by fitting the selector
as a separate component (e.g. in a control panel door or under the burner hood)
Notes on mounting 217

10 103,5
Additional mounting 6,5

surfaces
122
M5 x 4
(103,5)
Outer contour of housing
0,3
Figure 1: LMV26 / LMV36: Note on mounting
11/283

1.2.2 AGM60
101 69
Notes for mounting
M4 (4x)
6,5
x)
10 (2
97
110
85
Bild 258e/0309
0,3
Figure 2: AGM60: Note for mounting
Mounting method Screwed On a DIN rail
A = mounting B = removal
Mounting on DIN rails requires a

mounting clip!
Figure 3: AGM60: Mounting method
If the unit is screwed on, following must be observed:

 The AGM60 switch unit must be secured with fixing screws M4 (UNC32), observing
a maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm and using all 4 fixing points
 The additional mounting surfaces on the housing must be used; they are provided
to improve mechanical stability and must fully rest on the mounting surface.
The flatness of the mounting surface must be within a tolerance band of 0.3 mm
12/283

1.3 Installation notes
 Always run the high-voltage ignition cables separate from the unit and other cables
while observing the greatest possible distances
 Ensure that the electrical wiring inside the boiler is in compliance with national and
local safety regulations
 Mains power must always be supplied via L and N. This means that no potential
differential must exist between the neutral conductor N and protective conductor PE
 Phase and neutral conductor must not be interchanged (dangerous malfunctions,
loss of protection against electric shock hazard, etc.)
 Make certain that strain relief of the connected cables is in compliance with the
relevant standards (e.g. as per DIN EN 60730 and DIN EN 60335)
 Ensure that spliced wires cannot get into contact with neighboring terminals. Use
adequate ferrules
 The burner manufacturer must protect unused terminals of LMV26 / LMV36 and
AGM60 by fitting dummy plugs (exception: X64 (reserved) and X74)
 When making the wiring, ensure that the AC 230 V section is strictly separated from
other voltage sections, thus ensuring protection against electric shock hazard (for
more detailed information, refer to chapter Electrical connection of LMV26 / LMV36
and AGM60)
 The plugs of connecting line for the LMV26 / LMV36, must be connected or
disconnected only when the plant is dead (all-polar disconnection), since the BCI
does not ensure safe separation from mains voltage
 AGV50 signal cable from LMV26 / LMV36 and AZL2
Since the BC interface carries FELV (refer to chapter Electrical connection of
LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60), use of the AGV50 signal cable for connection from
the LMV26 / LMV36 to the AZL2 is mandatory, or observe the respective
specification. The signal cable is specified for use under the burner hood. When
using other types of signal cable that do not conform to the specification, protection
against electric shock hazard is not necessarily ensured
 Do not lay signal cable AGV50 from the LMV26 / LMV36 to the AZL2 together with
other cables
 Service operation with a longer signal cable from the LMV26 / LMV36:
If a longer signal cable is required for service work for example (short-time usage,
<24 hours), note that the above application under the burner hood no longer applies
and, for this reason, the signal cable can be subjected to increased mechanical
stress. In that case, use a reinforced signal cable
 Both the AGV50 signal cable and the AZL2 must be shipped and stored so that no
damage due to dust and water can occur when the products are used in the field
 To ensure protection against electric shock hazard, make certain that – prior to
switching on power – the AGV50 signal cable is correctly connected to the AZL2
 The AZL2 must be used in a dry and clean environment
 The connection between the actuators and the regulating units for fuel and
combustion air or any other regulating units must be form-fitted
 Once the LMV26 / LMV36 has been installed in the equipment, a check must be
carried out to ensure compliance with the EMC emission requirements!
 When grounded PELV signals are connected to the SELV terminals of the burner
control, they also become PELV voltages (according to EN 60730-1, chapter 11.2.7,
EN 298 chapter 9.2.d)
 An isolating transformer grounded on one side must be used if the wiring takes
place with a mains circuit without a grounded conductor or the mains supply
between the phases (in accordance with EN 298-1, chapter 9.2.d)
 To prevent high-energy couplings due to magnetic induction or capacitive coupling,
the cable lengths must be >10 m on the detector cables and communication lines
with a shielded cable, grounded on both sides (based on requirements from EN
13611)
 Testing torque of the screws RAST5 connector: 0.5 Nm
 Testing torque of the screws RAST3.5 connector: 0.25 Nm
13/283

1.3.1 Use of the AGM60
 To ensure correct fuel changeover, output Safety valve / magnetic clutch (X6-03 pin
3) must be connected to the respective input of the AGM60
(X32-01 pin 5)
The reason being the following:

Depending on the signal level at this output, the AGM60 sends the point in time for
fuel changeover to the LMV26 / LMV36
Caution!
The AGM60 must always be powered via the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit and
never directly by mains voltage
 The live conductor for fuel changeover (refer to chapter Fuel changeover) must
always be picked up at terminal X31-01 pin 4 of the AGM60
 Connecting cable between LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60 (also refer to chapter
Makeup of system): Use of this connecting cable is mandatory (available as an
accessory item, refer to chapter Type summary)
1.4 Electrical connections of LMV26 / LMV36 and

AGM60
For LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60, the following low-voltage categories are in use:
 SELV (safety extra low-voltage) and PELV (protective extra low-voltage) ensure
protection against electric shock hazard
 FELV (functional extra low-voltage)
Functional extra low-voltage without safe separation provides no protection, so that
risk would not be excluded in the event of failure
1.4.1 LMV26 / LMV36

Mains voltage
FELV
SELV
PELV
Mains voltage
Figure 4: LMV26 / LMV36 electrical connection
 Note
The safety class of the connected components determines whether SELV or PELV
applies. In the case of PELV, the respective component is earthed and connected to
protective earth.
14/283

1.4.2 AGM60
Mains voltage
Mains voltage FELV

Figure 5: AGM60 electrical connection
When installing the unit, make certain that non-insulated parts in the mounting frame do
not get into contact with the connection terminals. Also observe the lateral connecting
area:
Bild 263e/0309
Lateral connecting area

Figure 6: AGM60 lateral connecting area
15/283

1.5 Connection BC interface via integrated RJ11
jack (X56)
 If the BC interface (jack RJ11) is not used, protection against electric shock hazard
must be provided (jack must be covered up)
 The AZL2 signal cable or other accessories like the OCI410 interface (plugged into
the RJ11 jack), may only be plugged in or disconnected when the unit is dead (all-
polar disconnection), since the BC interface does not provide safe separation from
mains voltage
 The AZL2 is designed for direct connection to the integrated RJ11 jack on the
LMV26 / LMV36
 Signal cable from LMV26 / LMV36 to AZL2 must conform to certain specifications.
Siemens has specified the signal cable for use under the burner hood. When using
other signal cables, it is not guaranteed that the required cable features will be met.
 Do not lay the signal cable from the LMV26 / LMV36 to the AZL2 together with other
cables. Use a separate cable
 Service operation with a longer signal cable from LMV26 / LMV36 to AZL2
If a longer signal cable is required for service work, for example (short-time, <24
hours), note that the above usage under the burner hood no longer applies and, for
this reason, the signal cable can be subjected to increased mechanical stress. Extra
cable sheathing is therefore required
 Both the signal cable and the AZL2 must be shipped and stored so that no damage
due to dust and water can occur when used in the plant later on
 To ensure protection against electric shock hazard, make certain that, prior to
switching on power, the signal cable is correctly connected to the AZL2
 The AZL2 must be used in a dry and clean environment
Connection interface OCI410 on the BC interface
Connect the OCI410 interface without other extension with the USB interface at your PC,
follow the example design below.
LMV... PC software
ACS410
OCI410
RJ11 USB2.0
Bild 418e/0812
Figure 7: Connection interface OCI410 on the BC interface
16/283

1.6 Electrical connection of flame detectors
It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission:
 Never run the detector cables together with other cables
– Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal
– Use a separate cable
 Observe the permissible detector cable lengths
 The mains-powered ionization probe is not protected against electric shock hazard.
It must be protected against accidental contact
 Earth the burner in compliance with the relevant regulations; earthing the boiler
alone does not suffice
 Locate the ignition electrode and the ionization probe such that the ignition spark
cannot arc over to the ionization probe (risk of electrical overloads)
 Insulation resistance
- The insulation resistance must be >50 M between ionization probe and ground
- Soiled detector holders reduce the insulation resistance, thus supporting creepage
currents
1.7 Commissioning notes

 When commissioning the unit, check all safety functions
 There is no absolute protection against incorrect use of the RASTx connectors. For
this reason, prior to commissioning the plant, check the correct assignment of all
connectors
 Electromagnetic emissions must be checked on an application-specific basis
After the plant has been installed and commissioned, the person responsible for the
plant / heating engineer must document the parameterized values and settings (e.g.
curve characteristics) used for fuel-air ratio control.
These data can be printed out with the help of the ACS410 PC software, for example, or
must be written down.
This document must be kept in a safe place and checked by the expert.
Caution!
On the OEM level of the LMV26 / LMV36, parameter settings other than those
specified in the application standards can be made. For this reason, check
whether the parameter settings made are in compliance with the relevant
application standards (e.g. EN 676, EN 267, etc.), or whether the respective
plant demands special approval!
Fuel-air ratio The selected setting values of fuel and combustion air must be assigned such that –
control system while giving consideration to the combustion chamber / fuel pressure, temperature and
combustion air pressure, as well as wear of actuators and controlling elements, etc. –
correct operation with sufficient amounts of excess air is ensured across the burner’s full
output range for an extensive period of time (until the next regular inspection is due; also
refer to chapter Monitoring the positions). This must be proven by the burner / boiler
manufacturer by measuring the characteristic combustion process values. If the
standardization process is repeated, the fuel-air ratio control system must be rechecked.
LMV26 / LMV36 Prior to commissioning the system, the following points must be checked:
 Parameterization of operating mode (e.g. «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Lo mod», etc.)
must accord with the type of burner used (refer to chapter Selection of operating
mode)
 Correct assignment of the valves to the valve outputs of the LMV26 / LMV36
 Correct setting of the time parameters, especially the safety and prepurge times
 Correct functioning of the flame detector in the event of loss of flame during
operation (including the response time), with extraneous light, during the prepurge
time and, when there is no establishment of flame, at the end of the safety time
 Activation of the valve proving function and determination of the correct leakage
rate, if required by the application (refer to chapter Valve proving)
17/283

The functions of the following available or required input status signals must be
checked:
 Air pressure
 Minimum gas pressure / maximum gas pressure or POC
 Gas pressure valve proving
 Minimum oil pressure and maximum oil pressure
 Safety loop (e.g. safety limiter)
Duties of the expert when making the approval tests
Action Check / response

a) Burner startup with flame detector Lockout at the end of first safety time
darkened
b) Burner startup with flame detector exposed to Lockout at prepurge time
extraneous light, e.g. to incandescent light with
detectors for visible radiation, quartz-halogen bulb
or cigarette lighter flame with detectors for UV
radiation
c) Simulation of loss of flame during operation. For Lockout or restart, depending on the LMV26 / LMV36
that, darken the flame detector in the operating configuration
position and maintain that state
d) Check the plant’s response time with loss of flame Turning off power to the valves by the LMV26 / LMV36
during operation. For that purpose, manually within the period of time permitted for the respective
disconnect the fuel valves from power and check type of plant
the time from this moment the LMV26 / LMV36
requires to turn off power to the valve
e) Check the safe operation of the burner while giving LMV26 / LMV36 tolerances are the result of a number of
consideration to LMV26 / LMV36 tolerances factors.
Such as:
 Tolerances of actuators plus mechanical linkage to
the controlling elements
 Environmental conditions
(temperature, air conditions)
 Type of fuel (calorific value / pressure)
 Type of supply air path and flue ways
Example of procedure for checking the burner’s

response to actuator tolerances:
 Approach an output point in programming mode
(e.g. low-fire or high-fire)
 Change the actuator’s position against the optimum
fuel-air ratio setting as can be expected in the case
of tolerances
 Check the flue gas values with a flue gas analyzer
Recommendation:
Make this readjustment against the optimum ratio fuel-
air setting for one actuator at a time!
Further checks may be required, depending on the field of use and the relevant
standards.
18/283

1.8 Notes on settings and parameter settings
 When adjusting the electronic fuel-air ratio control system integrated in the
LMV26 / LMV36, allow for sufficient amounts of excess air since – over a period of
time – the flue gas settings are affected by a number of factors (e.g. density of air,
wear of actuators and controlling elements, etc.). For this reason, the flue gas
values initially set must be checked at regular intervals
 To safeguard against inadvertent or unauthorized parameter transfer from the PC
software ACS410 to the LMV26 / LMV36, the OEM must assign an individual burner
identification (ID) for each burner. Compliance with this regulation is mandatory to
ensure that the LMV26 / LMV36 prevents the transfer of parameter sets of some
other plant (with inadequate and possibly dangerous parameter values) to the
LMV26 / LMV36 via the PC software ACS410. In addition, the fuel-air ratio control
parameters must be manually approached and the combustion values checked
 With the LMV26 / LMV36, it is to be noted that the unit’s characteristics are
determined primarily by the specific parameter settings rather than the type of
LMV26 / LMV36. This means that, among other things, each time a plant is
commissioned, the parameter settings must be checked and the LMV26 / LMV36
must not be transferred from one plant to another without adapting the parameter
settings to the new plant
 When using the ACS410 PC software, the safety notes given in the relevant
Installation and Operating Instructions (J7352) must also be observed
 A password protects the parameter level against unauthorized access. The OEM
allocates individual passwords to the setting levels he can access. The default
passwords used by Siemens must be changed by the OEM. These passwords are
confidential and may only be given to persons authorized to access such setting
levels
 The responsibility for setting the parameters lies with the person who – in
accordance with his access rights – made changes to the respective setting level
In particular, the OEM (burner and / or boiler manufacturer) assumes

responsibility for the correct parameter settings in compliance with the standards
covering the specific applications (e.g. EN 676, EN 267, EN 746-2, etc.).
19/283

1.9 Standards and certificates
Applied directives:
 Low-voltage directive 2014/35/EC
 Directive for pressure devices 2014/68/EC
 Gas Appliances Regulation (EU) EU/2016/426
 Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) *) 2014/30/EC
*) The compliance with EMC emission requirements must be checked after the burner management
system is installed in equipment
Compliance with the regulations of the applied directives is verified by the adherence to
the following standards / regulations:
 Automatic burner control systems for burners and appliances DIN EN 298
burning gaseous or liquid fuels
 Safety and control devices for gas burners and gas burning DIN EN 1643
appliances - Valve proving systems for automatic shut-off
valves
 Gas/air ratio controls for gas burners and gas burning DIN EN 12067-2
appliances - Part 2: Electronic types
 Safety and control devices for burners and appliances DIN EN 13611
burning gaseous and/or liquid fuels — General requirements
 Safety and control devices for gas burners and gas-burning ISO 23552-1
appliances - Particular requirements
Part 1: Automatic and semi-automatic valves
 Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use DIN EN 60730-2-5
Part 2-5:
Particular requirements for automatic electrical burner control
systems
The relevant valid edition of the standards can be found in the declaration of
conformity!
 Note on DIN EN 60335-2-102

Household and similar electrical appliances - Safety - Part 2-102:
Particular requirements for gas, oil and solid-fuel burning appliances having electrical
connections. The electrical connections of the LMV26 / LMV36 and the AGM60 comply
with the requirements of EN 60335-2-102.
EAC Conformity mark (Eurasian Conformity mark)
ISO 9001:2015
ISO 14001:2015
OHSAS 18001:2007
China RoHS
Hazardous substances table:
http://www.siemens.com/download?A6V10883536
20/283

1.10 Service notes
 If fuses are blown, the unit must be returned to Siemens (refer to chapter
Warning notes)
 Error diagnostics can only be made via the LMV26 / LMV36 (BCI)
 Note!
Only authorized persons may replace the fuse (according to EN 298-1, chapter 9.2.r)
1.11 Life cycle

LMV26 / LMV36 The burner management system has a designed lifetime* of 250,000 burner startup
cycles which, under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to approx.
10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type field).
AGM60 The switch unit AGM60 has a designed lifetime* of 5,000 burner startup cycles which,
under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to approx.
10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type field).
General This lifetime is based on the endurance tests specified in standard EN 298.
A summary of the conditions has been published by the European Control
Manufacturers Association (Afecor) (www.afecor.org).
The designed lifetime is based on use of the LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60 according to the
manufacturer’s Data sheet and Basic Documentation and Data Sheet. When reaching
the designed lifetime in terms of the number of burner startup cycles or time of usage,
the LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60 must be replaced by authorized personnel.
* The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery
1.12 Disposal notes

The unit contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of
together with domestic waste. Local and currently valid legislation must be observed
21/283

2 System structure/function description
2.1 LMV26 / LMV36
LMV26 LMV36
Operating mode LMV26 + LMV36 +
AGM60 AGM60
 GAS only
Continuous operation --- --- ---
 Ionization only
 GAS and OIL  GAS and OIL
 GAS or OIL  GAS or OIL
Intermittent operation  GAS and GAS  GAS and GAS
 All sensors  All sensors
 All sensors  All sensors
The LMV26 / LMV36 is a microprocessor-based burner management system with

matching system components for the control and supervision of forced draft burners of
medium to high capacity.
For using of dual fuel with 2 fuel actuators, AGM60 switch unit is required.
Following are integrated in the LMV26 / LMV36:

 Burner management system complete with valve proving system
 Electronic fuel-air ratio control system for a maximum of 2 SQM3 or SQN1 actuators
 Control of VSD for air fan
 Modbus interface
Figure 8: System structure
Example: Dual fuel burner, gas modulating and oil 3-stage
The system components (AZL2, actuators) are connected directly to the LMV26 /
LMV36. All safety-related digital inputs and outputs of the LMV26 / LMV36 are
monitored by a contact feedback network.
The diagram shows the maximum functionality of the LMV26 / LMV36 system. The
actual functions are to be determined based on the respective execution / configuration.
22/283

2 System structure/function description 17.12.2018
2.2 For Europe
LMV26 / LMV36
For intermittent operation in connection with the LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60, the
ionization probe or the QRA, QRB or QRC optical flame detectors can be used.
LMV36:
Continuous operation is only possible when using an ionization probe and without an
AGM60.
2.3 General information

The burner management system is operated and parameterized either via the
AZL2 display and operating unit or with the help of the PC software ACS410.
The AZL2 with LCD and menu-driven operation facilitates straightforward use and
targeted diagnostics. When making diagnostics, the display shows the operating states,
the type of error and the point in time the error occurred. Passwords protect the different
parameter levels of the burner / boiler manufacturer and heating engineer against
unauthorized access. There is also a COM port which can be accessed from a
superposed system, such as a building automation.
On the BCI interface via interface OCI410, a PC can be connected with the PC software
ACS410 (for dual fuel operation  on request).
Among other features, the PC software ACS410 enables convenient readout of settings
and operating states, parameterization of the LMV26 / LMV36 and trend recordings.
The burner / boiler manufacturer can select from different types of fuel trains and make
use of a wide choice of individual parameter settings (program times, configuration of
inputs / outputs, etc.), enabling him to make optimum adaptations to the relevant
application. The actuators are driven by stepper motors and can be positioned with high
resolution. Specific features and actuator settings are defined by the LMV26 / LMV36
basic unit.
23/283

2.4 AGM60
The AGM60 switch unit connected to the LMV26 / LMV36 serves for changeover of
valve control or for feedback signals from the 2 types of fuel. The signals are monitored
by the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit (same as with the single-fuel variant) which, in the
event of fault, also triggers shutdown.
LMV... M Actuator air
Pressure input L Fuel valve outlets

N Fuel0 SA
PE Fuel1 Fuel
Fuel valve Fuel0

Pressure input Fuel0
Fuel valve Fuel1
AGM60...
Fuel actuator Fuel0
Pressure input Fuel1
Fuel actuator Fuel1
Bild 264e/0309
Fuel selection
Figure 9: Connection of fuel actuators
2.4.1 Electrical connections of fuel actuators
When using only 1 fuel actuator, it must be connected directly to the LMV26 / LMV36. In
that case, a connecting cable (AGV60.50) is not required.
When using 2 fuel actuators for each type, they must be connected to the AGM60
Fuel selection choices:

 Gas / oil
 Gas / gas
 Oil / oil
When wiring the components, we recommend to make the following fuel assignments as
standard:
Fuel 0 = gas
Fuel 1 = oil
This can be set via parameter 201 / 301 (refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).
Following switching’s of inputs and outputs are made via AGM60:

 Fuel at the LMV26 / LMV36
 Fuel valve
 Pressure switch or POC
 Actuator (SQM3 or SQN1)
24/283

2.4.2 Continuous operation
The LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit together with the AGM60 is not approved for continuous
operation.
In the case of intermittent operation in connection with the LMV26 / LMV36, an

ionization probe or flame detector QRA, QRB or QRC can be used.
2.4.3 Fuel changeover
The fuel selection is made by an external connected switch at AGM60

The changeover logic of the AGM60 generates feedback signals Fuel 0 and Fuel 1
which are fed to the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit for evaluation.
 Note
Fuel changeover via the AZL2 or a building automation system is not technically
possible.
LMV... AGM60...
SWI
Fuel PE
1
1
X31-01
X9-04
N
4
L
1 X31-02
X8-04
0 1
Fuel
2
Bild 265/0409
Figure 10: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Fuel changeover
The next burner start after shutdown or safety shutdown takes place with the new type
of fuel.
After fuel changeover, any manually selected output or output called for by the building
automation system is cancelled and automatic operation is activated, thus enabling
automatic restart with the new fuel if there is a request for heat.
Exception:
The manual off function for manual output and burner off (output = 0) via the building
automation system are maintained.
Feedback signals Fuel 0 and Fuel 1 can also be used for manual reset and lockout
(refer to chapter Fuel selection / reset / lockout).
2.4.4 Extra fuel selector

AGM60...
Fuel PE
SWI
1
X31-01
N
L
Bild 266/0309
Figure 11: AGM60 extra fuel selector
25/283

3 Type summary
3.1 LMV26 / LMV36
Microprocessor-controlled basic unit for single-fuel burners of any capacity for
intermittent operation, with electronic fuel-air ratio control, with up to 2 actuators,
integrated gas valve proving and VSD control.
Article no. Type Mains voltage Parameter set Flame detectors

QRA2 / QRA4 / QRA10 / QRB /
BPZ:LMV26.300A2 LMV26.300A2 AC 230 V Europe
QRC / ION
QRA2 / QRA4 / QRA10 / QRB /
S55402-C201-A100 LMV36.300A2 AC 230 V Europe
QRC / ION
3.2 AGM60
The AGM60 switch unit is for connection to the LMV26 / LMV36 and used for
changeover of valve control and/or for handling feedback signals from the 2 types of
fuel.
Article no. Type Mains voltage

BPZ:AGM60.1A9 AGM60.1A9 AC 230 V
3.3 Fuel selector

The fuel selector is not a component of the AGM60 and does not constitute part of the
scope of delivery.
26/283

3 Type summary 17.12.2018
4 Technical data
4.1 LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit
Mains voltage AC 230 V -15 % / +10 %
Mains frequency 50 / 60 Hz ±6 %
Power consumption <30 W (typically)
Safety class I, with parts according to II and III to
DIN EN 60730-1
Degree of protection IP00 to DIN EN 60529
Note
The burner or boiler manufacturer must
ensure degree of protection IP40 for the
LMV26 / LMV36 as per DIN EN 60529
through adequate installation
Mode of operation Type 2B in accordance with
DIN EN 60730-1
Rated surge voltage In accordance with DIN EN 60730-1
chapter 20 (OC III)
Voltage and current for the purposes of The emitted interference measurement
the EMC emitted interference tests test takes place with mains voltage and
maximum power consumption
4.1.1 Terminal loading Inputs
 Perm. mains primary fuse Max. 16 AT

(externally)
 Unit fuse F1 (internally) 6.3 AT (DIN EN 60127 2 / 5)
 Mains supply: Input current depending on the operating state of the unit
Undervoltage
 Safety shutdown from operating Approx. AC 190 V
position at mains voltage
 Restart on rise in mains voltage Approx. AC 195 V
Status inputs: Status inputs (with the exception of the safety loop) of the contact
feedback network are used for system supervision and require mains-related input
voltage
 Input safety loop Refer to Terminal loading outputs
 Input currents and input voltages
- UeMax UN +10 %
- UeMin UN -15 %
- IeMax 1.5 mA peak
- IeMin 0.7 mA peak
 Contact material recommendation Gold-plated silver contacts
for external signal sources (air
pressure switch, pressure switch-
min, pressure switch-max, etc.)
 Transition / settling behavior /
bounce
- Perm. bounce time of contacts Max. 50 ms
when switching on / off (after the bounce time, contact must stay
closed or open)
 UN AC 230 V
 Voltage detection
- On AC 180...253 V
- Off <AC 80 V
27/283

4 Technical data 17.12.2018
4.1.2 Terminal loading Outputs
Total contact loading:

 Rated voltage AC 230 V, 50 / 60 Hz
 Unit input current (safety loop) from: Max. 5 A
- Fan motor contactor
- Ignition transformer
- Valves
- Oil pump / magnetic clutch
(optional via AGM60)
Individual contact loading:

Fan motor contactor
 Rated current 2A
 Power factor Cos >0.4
Alarm output
Ignition transformer
Fuel valves
Operation display
 Rated current 0.5 A
Safety valve (magnetic clutch / oil pump)
Connections for pressure switch
 Rated current 1.5 mA
 Power factor ---
Power supply for pressure switch-max / POC (X5-02 pin 3 or X22-02 pin 3)
 IaMax <10 mA
Fuel feedback to LMV26 / LMV36 (X31-02 pin 1 or X31-02 pin 2)
 IaMax <10 mA
4.1.3 Analog output / load output X74 pin 3
Accuracy of output voltage ±1%
28/283

4.1.4 Cable lengths
 Mains line AC 230 V Max. 100 m (100 pF/m)

 Display, BC interface For installation under the burner hood or
in the control panel
Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Load controller X5-03 Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 Load controller analog X64 (24 mA) Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 Safety loop / burner flange (total) Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 External lockout reset button Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 Safety valve Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 Load output ¹) Max. 10 m (100 pF/m)
 VSD control ¹)²) Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Speed input Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Fuel valve V1 / V2 / V3 Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Pilot valve Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Ignition transformer Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Other lines Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
¹) Do not run the cable together with other cables. If not observed, hum voltage might cause
electromagnetic interference
²) Shorter cable length due to closed control loop
Specification as per EN 60730-1

Type of shutdown or interruption of each circuit
Shutdown with microswitch 1-pole
Mode of operation Type 2 B
4.1.5 Cross-sectional areas
The cross-sectional areas of the mains power lines (L, N, and PE) and, if required, the
safety loop (safety limit thermostat, water shortage, etc.) must be sized for rated
currents according to the selected external primary fuse. The cross-sectional areas of
the other cables must be sized in accordance with the internal unit fuse (max. 6.3 AT).
Min. cross-sectional area 0.75 mm²

(single- or multi-core as per VDE 0100)
Cable insulation must meet the relevant temperature requirements and environmental
conditions.
Fuses (F1) used inside the LMV26 / 6.3 AT DIN EN 60127 2 / 5

LMV36 basic unit
4.1.6 Connections of actuators
The ready connected actuator cables must not be extended.
29/283

4.2 Signal cable AGV50 from AZL2  BC interface
Signal cable Color white
Unshielded
Conductor 4 x 0.141 mm²
With RJ11 connector
Cable length
- AGV50.100 1m
- AGV50.300 3m
Location Under the burner hood (extra measures
required for SKII EN 60730-1)
4.3 Environmental conditions

Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1
Climatic conditions Class 1K3
Mechanical conditions Class 1M2
Temperature range -20...+60 °C
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3
Humidity <95 % r.h.
Installation altitude Max. 2,000 m above sea level
Caution!
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!
30/283

4.4 Flame detectors
4.4.1 Ionization probe
For continuous operation!
No-load voltage at ION terminal Approx. UMains

(X10-05 pin 2)
Caution!
The ionization probe must be protected against electric shock hazard!
Short-circuit current Max. AC 1 mA

Required detector current Min. DC 2.3 µA, flame display approx.
30%
When the more sensitive flame

supervision is activated, the required
detector current is halved (see chapter
Flame detection sensitivity).
Possible detector current Max. DC 12…30 µA, flame display
approx. 100 %
Max. perm. length of detector cable 3 m (wire–ground 100 pF/m)
(laid separately)
Warning!
Simultaneous operation of QRA and ionization probe is not permitted!
 Note
The higher the detector cable’s capacitance (cable length), the more voltage at the
ionization probe, and thus the detector current, drops. Long cable lengths plus very
highly resistive flames might necessitate low-capacitance detector cables (e.g. ignition
cable). In spite of technical measures taken in the circuitry aimed at compensating
potential adverse effects of the ignition spark on the ionization current, it must be
made certain that the minimum detector current required is already reached during
the ignition phase. If this is not the case, the connections on the primary side of the
ignition transformer must be changed and/or the electrodes relocated.
31/283

Threshold values when flame is supervised by an ionization probe:
- Start prevention (extraneous light) Intensity of flame (parameter 954) ≥18%
- Operation Intensity of flame (parameter 954) >24%
Ionization input
100
Bild 442en/0916
90
80
70
60
Flame intensity in %
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Ionization current in µA
Figure 12: Ionization input at AC 230 V
Measuring circuit for Ionization probe

detector current
measurement M Legend
LMV...
X10-05/2 C Electrolytic capacitor 100...470 µF; DC 10...25 V

C ION Ionization probe
ION
M Microammeter Ri max. 5000 
X10-05/1
Figure 13: Measuring circuit for ionization probe
32/283

4.4.2 UV flame detectors QRA2 / QRA4 / QRA10
Caution!
If QRA2-UV tubes / QRA4-UV tubes / QRA10-UV tubes are used for flame
supervision on the LMV26 / LMV36, it must be ensured that the basic unit is
permanently connected to power (EN 298), thus enabling the LMV26 / LMV36 to
detect flame detector failures during startup and shutdown.
Generally, the LMV26 / LMV36 works with QRA flame detectors in intermittent
operation.
For technical data, refer to Data Sheet N7712 covering QRA2 / QRA10 UV flame
detector!
For technical data, refer to Data Sheet N7711 covering QRA4 UV flame detector!
Operating voltage Max. 350 V peak

Required detector current in operation Min. 30 µA
When the more sensitive flame

supervision is activated, the required
detector current is halved (see chapter
Flame detection sensitivity).
Possible detector current in operation Max. 600 µA
Permissible length of flame detector cable Max. 6 m
normal cable (laid separately)
Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRA:

- Start prevention (extraneous light) Intensity of flame (parameter 954) ≥18%
- Operation Intensity of flame (parameter 954) >24%
Measuring circuit for UV flame detector QRA

detector current
measurement
QRA...
Figure 14: Measuring circuit QRA
Legend
A Incidence of light
C Electrolytic capacitor 100...470 µF; DC 10...25 V
M Microammeter Ri max. 5000 
Warning!
 Input QRA is not short-circuit-proof!
Short-circuits of X10-06 pin 2 against earth can destroy the QRA input
 Simultaneous operation of QRA and ionization probe is not permitted!
33/283

4.4.3 Photoresistive flame detectors QRB1 / QRB3
No-load voltage at QRB1/QRB3 terminal Approx. DC 5 V

(X10-05 pin 3)
Max. perm. length of QRB1/QRB3 3 m (wire – wire 100 pF/m)
detector
cable (laid separately)
 Note
A detector resistance of RF <500  is identified as a short-circuit and leads to safety
shutdown in operation as if the flame had been lost.
For this reason, before considering the use of a highly sensitive photoresistive detector
(QRB1B or QRB3S), it should be checked whether this type of flame detector is indeed
required! Increased line capacitance between QRB1/QRB3 connection and mains live
wire L has an adverse effect on the sensitivity and increases the risk of damaged flame
detectors due to overvoltage. Always run detector cables separately!
Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRB1/QRB3:

Start prevention (extraneous light) <400 k
with RQRB Intensity of flame ≥10%
Operation with RQRB <230 k
Intensity of flame >16%
Short-circuit detection with RQRB <0.5 k
Bild 462en/0718
0,1 1 10 100 1000
Figure 15: QRB1/QRB3 input at AC 230 V
A flame detector resistance of RF <500 Ω is identified as a short-circuit and leads to

safety shutdown in operation, like in the case of loss of flame.
34/283

4.4.4 Yellow flame detector QRB4
Open-circuit voltage at terminal QRB4 Approx. 5 V DC

(X10-05 pin 3)
Permissible length of QRB4 detector 3 m (wire to wire100 pF/m)
cable (laid separately)
Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRB4

Start prevention (extraneous light) Flame intensity (parameter 954) ≥10%
Operation Flame intensity (parameter 954) >16%
Note!
 In the case of the QRB4, the maximum intensity display is limited to approximately
40% due to the system (parameter 954).
Note!
Connection of QRB4 cables!
 Blue cable of QRB4 to terminal X10-05 pin 4.
Black cable of QRB4 to terminal X10-05 pin 3.
Otherwise, the QRB4 will not work.
35/283

4.4.5 Blue-flame detectors QRC
Check the intensity of flame with the AZL2.
For system-specific reasons, the display of maximum flame intensity by the AZL2 is
limited to approx. 55%.
Caution!
Flame detectors QRC are only suited for AC 230 V operation.
Start prevention (extraneous light) with Ca. 15 µA, display approx. 10 %

IQRC Intensity of flame (parameter 954)
Operation with IQRC Ca. 25 µA, display approx. 16 %
Intensity of flame (parameter 954)
Required detector current Permissible detector current Typical detector current

(with flame) (without flame) (with flame)
QRC Min. 70 µA Max. 5,5 µA 100 µA
The values given in the table above only apply under the following conditions:
- Mains voltage AC 230 V
- Ambient temperature 23 °C
X10-05
Measuring circuit for 3 4 5 LMV...
detector current Legend
sw bl br 7541v12/1110
measurement +
µA DC DC-Mikroampèremeter an internal resistance of
Ri = max. 5 k
µA DC bl blue
sw black
br brown
Figure 16: Measuring circuit QRC
36/283

4.5 Switch unit AGM60
Mains voltage AC 230 V -15% / +10%
Mains frequency 50/60 Hz ±6%
Power consumption <5 W (typically) (without actuator supply)
Safety class I with parts according to II and III to
DIN EN 60730-1
Galvanic separation between mains No
voltage terminals and actuator signal
lines and actuator supply lines
Degree of protection IP00
 Note!
The burner or boiler manufacturer (OEM)
must ensure degree of protection IP40 to
DIN EN 60529 for burner controls by
adequate installation of the AGM60.
The AGM60 together with the LMV26 /

LMV36 is suited for installation under the
burner hood or inside a control cabinet or
control panel
Detection time fuel changeover <400 ms
Switching frequency fuel changeover Min. 3 s
Switching cycles fuel changeover Max. 5´000
Perm. mains primary fuse (externally) Max. 6.3 AT
Power must always be supplied via the
LMV26 / LMV36
(refer to chapter Inputs / Outputs)
Mains supply:
Input current depending on the operating state of the unit
Mains voltage is monitored by the LMV26 / LMV36
Dimensions (W x H x D) 180.7 x 120.7 x 51.7 mm
Mounting Top hat rail to DIN EN 60715,
35 mm or screwed
37/283

4.5.1 Terminal output Inputs
Status input: Fuel selection, pressure switch

 Input currents and input voltages
- UeMax UN +10%
- UeMin UN -15%
- IeMax 1.5 mA peak
- IeMin 0.7 mA peak
 Contact material recommendation Gold-plated silver contacts
for external switching contact,
transducer (pressure switch-max,
POC)
 Transition / settling behavior /
bounce
- Perm. bounce time of contacts Max. 50 ms
when switching on/off (after the bounce time, the contact must
stay closed or open)
 UN AC 230 V
 Voltage detection
- On AC 180...253 V
- Off <AC 80 V
4.5.2 Terminal output Outputs
Total contact output:

 Rated voltage AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Refer also Total contact output in chapter Terminal output Outputs
Individual contact loads:

Fuel valve
Safety valve (magnetic clutch / oil pump)
Connections for pressure switch
 Rated voltage AC 230 V , 50/60 Hz
 Rated current 1.5 mA
 Power factor ---
Power supply for pressure switch-max / POC (X5-02 pin 3 or X22-02 pin 3)
 IaMax <10 mA
Fuel feedback to LMV26 / LMV36
(X31-02 pin 1 or X31-02 pin 2)
 IaMax <10 mA
38/283

4.5.3 Cable lengths
 Mains line Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)

LMV26 / LMV36  AGM60
 Fuel valves Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Other lines Max. 3 m (100 pF/m)
 Fuel selector Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
 Load controller Max. 20 m (100 pF/m)
Specification as per EN 60730-1

Type of shutdown or interruption of each circuit
Shutdown with microswitch Single-pole
Mode of operation Type 2 B
4.5.4 Cross-sectional areas
The cross-sectional areas of the power supply lines (L, N and PE) must be capable of
carrying the rated currents according to the built-in unit fuse of the respective LMV26 /
LMV36 (max. 6.3 AT).
Cross-sectional area Min. 0.75 mm²

(single- or multi-core to VDE 0100)
Cable insulations must satisfy the relevant temperature requirements and environmental
conditions.
4.5.5 Electrical connections of actuators
The ready connected actuator cables must not be extended.
4.5.6 Environmental conditions
Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1

Humidity <95% r.h.
Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2
Humidity <95% r.h.
Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3
Humidity <95% r.h.
Installation altitude Max. 2,000 m above sea level
Caution!
Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted!
39/283

5 Dimensions
5.1 LMV26 / LMV36
Dimensions in mm
230
202
192
141
82,5
22,8
17,3
10,2
16,5
25,5
39,3
53,6
76,6
100,8
118,5
118,5
135
122
R100
12,5 23,5
27,2
82,5
128,5
172
202
217
19,5
19,7
60
Figure 17: Dimensions of the LMV26 / LMV36
40/283

5 Dimensions 17.12.2018
5.2 AGM60
Dimensions in mm
170 5,4
105 37,9
5,4
43,4
120,7
110
34
180,7
51,7
Figure 18: Dimensions of the AGM60
6 Display and diagnostics

Transmission of operating states, fault status messages and detailed service information
via:
BCI communication via integrated RJ11 jack to the AZL2 display and operating unit, or
via additional OCI410 interface to ACS410 PC software
Communication / parameterization
AZL2 The AZL2 offers ease of operation, parameterization and targeted diagnostics via
features menu-driven operation. When making diagnostics, the display shows operating
states, the type of error and startup meter reading. Passwords protect the different
parameter levels of the burner / boiler manufacturer and heating engineer against
unauthorized access.
ACS410 PC software ACS410 PC software enabled a simple operation, comfortable readout of settings and
operating states, the parameterization, trend recording and targeted diagnostic of
LMV26 / LMV36.
For this purpose, the OCI410 interface for communication with the LMV26 / LMV36 is
connected to the PC. This interface is available separately and is connected to the
integrated RJ11 jack.
41/283

6 Display and diagnostics 17.12.2018
7 Basic unit LMV26 / LMV36
7.1 Description of inputs and outputs
This chapter covers the key features of the LMV26 / LMV36 inputs and outputs. For
exact use of the inputs and the activation of outputs, refer to chapter Sequence
diagrams.
Flame signal input and LMV...

flame detector X10–05 5 br
L
and X10–06 4 bl
QRB... / QRC... GND
X10-05
3 sw
QRB.../QRC... signal voltage
2
Ionization probe (ION)
1
Protective earth (PE)
Bild 271en/0718
Figure 19: Flame signal input X10-05
LMV...
2
X10-06
QRA...
1
Bild 272/0409
Figure 20: Flame signal input X10-06
Connection choices:
 Ionization probe
 QRA2 / QRA10
 QRA4
 QRB
 QRC
42/283

7 Basic unit LMV26 / LMV36 17.12.2018
7.2 Flame detectors
For display of the flame on the AZL2, the following general conditions apply:
 Display is subject to various component tolerances, which means that deviations of
10% can occur
 Note that, for physical reasons, there is no linear relationship between flame display
and detector signal values
The LMV26 / LMV36 can be used with different types of flame detectors. For the correct
use of flame detectors, refer to chapter Sequence diagrams.
The flame detector used must be correctly parameterized.
Caution!
Only ionization probes are suited for continuous operation!
In the hardware of the LMV26 / LMV36, the flame signals are subdivided into 2 groups
(group 0 covering the QRB and QRC, and group 1 covering ionization and the QRA).
The flame detector for gas is selected via parameter 221 / 321 (fuel 1), that for oil via
parameter 261 / 361 (fuel 1).
No. Parameter
Gas: Active detector flame evaluation
221 0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
Oil: Active detector of flame evaluation
261 0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
Fuel 1 gas: Active detector of flame evaluation
321 0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
Fuel 1 oil: Active detector of flame evaluation
361 0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
43/283

7.2.1 Loss of flame
In the event of loss of flame, the unit initiates safety shutdown, followed by a restart, if
required. A repetition counter can be used to select the number of flame losses after
which the unit shall initiate lockout (refer to chapter Repetition counter).
Error Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36

code code
7 0 Loss of flame
No. Parameter
Software drop out delay time of flame signal (100 ms)
186 Index 0 = QRB / QRC (0 = deactivated, >1 = activated)
Index 1 = ION / QRA (0 = deactivated, >3 = activated) (only 200 ms-steps)
Fuel 1: Software drop out delay time of flame signal (100 ms)
187 Index 0 = QRB / QRC (0 = deactivated, >1 = activated)
Index 1 = ION / QRA (0 = deactivated, >3 = activated) (only 200 ms-steps)
194 Repetition limit no flame at the end of safety time
1 = no repetition
2...4 = 1...3 repetitions
Recharging time:
Entering into operation
Repetition limit value loss of flame
240 1 = no repetition
280 2 = 1 repetition
340
380 Recharging time:
After the Operation phase
Caution!
The response time of the flame detector leads to an extension of the second
safety time. This must be taken into account when designing the burner!
7.2.2 Extraneous light
Extraneous light during standby (phase 12) leads to prevention of startup, followed by a
restart. Extraneous light during the prepurge phase results in immediate lockout. If
extraneous light occurs during the shutdown phase, the LMV26 / LMV36 switches to the
safety phase.
One repetition is permitted. This means that if the error occurs again the next time the
system is shut down, the unit will initiate lockout.

code code
4 0 Extraneous light during startup
1 Extraneous light during shutdown
2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup
7.2.3 No flame at the end of safety time
If no flame is established by the end of the first safety time, the unit initiates lockout.

code code
2 1 No flame at end of the first safety time
2 No flame at end of the second safety time
44/283

7.2.4 Flame intensity
The flame’s intensity can be displayed. It is standardized from 0 to 100%.
No. Parameter
954 Intensity of flame
 Note
Also refer to chapter Intensity of flame during curve settings.
7.2.5 Supervision of flame detector

code code
93 3 Short-circuit of flame detector
At the QRB / QRC flame detector’s input, the LMV26 / LMV36 checks the detector for
short-circuits in operation.
7.2.6 Flame detection sensitivity
For applications with a high degree of modulation (e.g. 1:15 / 1:20), it may be necessary
to increase the flame detection sensitivity. This can be carried out via parameters for
flame detection with ionization probe or UV flame detector QRA.
The ignition (phases 40...52) always takes place with standard flame sensitivity.
The high flame sensitivity for ionization probe or QRA is only activated during operation
(from phase 60).
This means that the ignition load must be set so that the burner ignites reliably with
regular flame sensitivity.
It is also possible to deactivate the more sensitive flame detection for the output range
above the ignition point (default setting curvepoint P4, i.e. 50% of the theoretical output
of the LMV26 / LMV36).
No. Parameter
Setting the flame signal sensitivity ionization probe / QRA in operation (≥
phase 60)
197
0 = standard
1 = approx. twice as high sensitivity
Maximum output for high flame sensitivity
198 2 = no maximum output for high flame sensitivity
3…9 = deactivation of the high flame sensitivity from the curvepoint P3…P9
45/283

7.3 Digital inputs
7.3.1 Safety loop X3–04 (optional pressure switch-max), pin 1 and 2
Input for connection of the safety loop. When any of the series-connected contacts
included in the loop opens, power supply to the fuel valves, the fan and the ignition
equipment is instantly cut.
The safety loop includes the following components:

 External burner switch (ON / OFF)
 Safety limiter / safety pressure limiter
 External control thermostat and / or pressurestat, if required
 Water shortage switch
 Note
Pressure switch-max when using POC via X5-02.
LMV...
T6.3 IEC
5 L
4 Si
Line voltage (N)
3
2
Power signal for safety loop
Safety loop 1
(optional pressure switch-max)
shortage
STB
Bild 273en/0916
Water
Figure 21: Safety loop (optional pressure switch-max) X3-04
For diagnostic purposes, the contacts of the components included in the safety loop and
the burner flange contact are combined for delivering the safety loop signal. If there is
no such signal, the system initiates safety shutdown in any event.
If, with Load controller on, there is no signal from the safety loop (prevention of startup),
error code 22 is translated to text display OFF S (S = safety loop) and the numerical
value appears in the error history.

code code
22 0 Safety loop / burner flange Open
OFF S
For the input, a repetition counter can be parameterized. Here, it is possible to set the
number of errors permitted until lockout occurs (refer to chapter Repetition counter).
No. Parameter
Repetition limit safety loop
1 = no repetition
2...15 = 1...14 number of repetitions
215 16 = constant repetition
Recharging time:
Every 24 hours
Attention!
In the safety loop, temporarily (<1 s) switching contacts must not be wired (switch or
other)!
46/283

7.3.2 Burner flange X3–03, pin 1 and 2
End switch burner flange (component of safety loop).
LMV...
Flange
2
“L” for end switch burner flange
X3-03
1
End switch burner flange
(component of safety loop)
Bild 274e/1010
Figure 22: Burner flange X3-03
For error diagnostics and parameters, refer to chapter Safety loop.
7.3.3 Input for external load controller (ON / OFF) X5–03, pin 1
When the external control loop is closed, the internal input message Heat request is
generated.
A heat request exists when the external load controller signal is pending and, depending
on the configuration, a load controller calls for heat (refer to chapter Connection of load
controllers).
When there are no more requests for heat, the burner shuts down. The fuel valves are
closed, either immediately when the timer has elapsed, or when the low-fire position is
reached, depending on the parameter settings (refer to chapter End of operating
position).
 Note
Burner startup takes place only when this contact is closed.
LMV...
“L” for controller

External load controller OPEN / stage 2
X5-03
External load controller (On / Off)
1 On / Off
Bild 275e/1010
Figure 23: Inputs for external load controller ON / OFF X5-03
7.3.4 Inputs X5-03 pin 2 and 3 (Open / Close or stage 2 / stage 3)
Inputs for connection of an external load controller with contact outputs (refer to chapter
External load controller via contacts X5-03, pin 2 and 3).
LMV...
“L” for controller

External load controller OPEN / stage 2
X5-03
External load controller (On / Off)

1 On / Off
Bild 275e/1010
Figure 24: Inputs external load controller Open / Close X5-03
47/283

7.3.5 Air pressure switch X3–02
Input for connection of an air pressure switch. Air pressure is anticipated when the fan is
switched on. If there is no air pressure signal, the system initiates lockout. The air
pressure switch must have a NO contact.
If no air pressure switch is required (e.g. when firing on oil), a wire link to the fan output
must be fitted (between X3-02, pin 1, and X3-05, pin 1).
Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without air
pressure switch. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on the
type of application.
LMV...
2
“L” for air pressure switch (LP)
X3-02
1
Air pressure switch (LP)
Bild 277e/1010
Figure 25: Air pressure switch X3-02
No. Parameter
235 Gas: Air pressure switch
1 = active
2 = active, except phase 60...66 / 70...72 (pneumatic operation only)
335 Fuel 1 Gas: Air pressure switch
1 = active
2 = active, except phase 60...66 / 70...72 (pneumatic operation only)

code code
3 0 Air pressure off
1 Air pressure on
4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup
For the input, a repetition counter can be parameterized. Here, it is possible to set the
number of errors that are permitted until lockout occurs (refer to subsection Repetition
counter).
No. Parameter
196 Repetition limit air pressure failure
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
3 = 2 repetitions
Recharging time:
End of Shutdown phase / 24 hours continuous operation
48/283

7.3.6 Gas pressure switch for valve proving
The LMV26 / LMV36 has no separate pressure switch for valve proving. Valve proving is
performed via gas pressure switch-min, which must be fitted between the valves.
No. Parameter
Gas: Execution valve proving
0 = no valve proving
241 1 = valve proving on startup
2 = valve proving on shutdown
3 = valve proving on startup and shutdown
Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving

code code
12 81 Fuel valve V1 leaking
83 Fuel valve V2 leaking
49/283

7.3.7 Gas pressure switch-min / oil pressure switch-min, start
release gas X5–01
Input for connection of a pressure switch-min for gas or oil: If the plant does not require
a pressure switch-min, a wire link must be fitted between pin 2 and 3.
Gas pressure switch-min
The LMV26 / LMV36 enables parameterization of which gas train position the gas
pressure switch-min is mounted on. This also influences the time of the input evaluation.
No. Parameter
Gas: Input pressure switch-min
1 = pressure switch-min before fuel valve V1
236 2 = valve proving (between fuel valve V1 and fuel valve V2) via pressure
switch-min
3 = pressure switch-min after fuel valve V2
Fuel 1 gas: Input pressure switch-min
336 2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min
(between fuel valve V1 and fuel valve V2)
In all types of gas trains, the minimum gas pressure is expected from phase 22 in the
default setting (value 2).
If no gas pressure is detected after the filling time (parameter 244) has elapsed, the gas
shortage program is started (refer to chapter Gas shortage program).
If value 1 is set (gas pressure switch-min upstream of the fuel valves), the gas shortage
check takes place from phase 22 as part of commissioning.
When the gas pressure switch-min is mounted after the fuel valves, a gas shortage
check cannot be carried out. The supervision of the gas pressure is only carried out
from phase 40 (direct ignition) or from phase 50 (pilot ignition) depending on the fuel
train used.
If valve proving is required in cases where parameter 236 is set to a value other than 2,
the corresponding pressure switch must be connected to terminal X5-02 (parameter
237).
LMV...
“L” for pressure switch

X5-01
Pressure switch-min
Bild 394e/0812
Figure 26: Gas pressure switch-min /oil pressure switch -min X5-01
Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without
pressure switch-min. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on
the type of application.
No. Parameter
214 Maximum time start release
50/283

During the safety times, the signal received from pressure switch-min is only assessed
after a certain period of time has elapsed, in order to ignore the pressure shocks that
occur the moment the valves open. The time to elapse for signal assessment can be
parameterized.
No. Parameter
229 Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety time
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety
time
If the gas pressure fails, at least a shutdown will be initiated.

code code
20 0 Pressure switch-min
No minimum gas pressure
20 1 Gas shortage start prevention
No minimum gas pressure / oil pressure
For the input, a repetition counter can be parameterized. It can be used to set the
number of errors permitted until lockout occurs. The counter also impacts the gas
shortage program (refer to chapter Repetition counter).
No. Parameter
223 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min

16 = constant repetition
Recharging time:
Start release gas
Function Start release gas is not supported.
51/283

Oil pressure switch-min
In all types of oil train, the minimum oil pressure is expected from phase 38. If no oil
pressure is detected when the maximum time (parameter 217) has elapsed or if,
subsequently, the oil pressure drops, the system initiates lockout.
 Note
With fuel 1, oil pressure switch-min is always deactivated!
If an oil pressure switch-min is required, fuel 0 must be used. If, at the same time, fuel 1
is burned when operating on gas, pressure switches-max for both types of fuel must be
connected in series. This means that the changeover contact of the AGM60 becomes
available and can be used for changeover of pressure switches-min.
No. Parameter
Maximum wait time for detecting a detector signal or pressure switch signal
217
(e.g. home run, preignition)

code code
No min. oil pressure
During the safety times, the signal from pressure switch-min is only assessed when a
certain period of time has elapsed to ignore the pressure shocks that occur the moment
the valves open. The time to elapse for signal assessment can be parameterized.
No. Parameter
269 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety time
Fuel 1 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety
369
time
7.3.8 Setting the time for checking the pressure switch
For oil pressure switch-min, the point in time from which the check is made can be set
via parameter 276 (active from phase 38, or from safety time).
No. Parameter
Oil: Input pressure switch-min

276 1 = active from phase 38
2 = active from safety time
52/283

7.3.9 Gas / oil pressure switch-max / or POC contact, start release
oil / additional speed-dependent air pressure switch X5–02
Input for connection of a pressure switch-max for gas or oil: The sensor must have an
NC contact, which means that the contact opens when the adjusted maximum pressure
is exceeded. If the plant does not require a pressure switch-max, a wire link must be
fitted between pin 2 and 3.
Caution!
The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without
pressure switch-min. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on
the type of application.
LMV...
“L” for pressure switch
X5-02
Pressure switch-max or POC
Protective earth (PE) Pmax/POC
Bild 279e/1010
Figure 27: LMV26 / LMV36: Gas pressure switch-max / oil pressure switch-max or POC X5-02
AGM60...
P 1
Oilmax 2
3
P 1
LMV... Gasmax 2
“L” for pressure switch 3 3

2 1
X5-02
Pressure switch-max or POC

Protective earth (PE) 1 2
3
Bild 280e/1010
V3
4
5
Figure 28: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Gas pressure switch-max /oil pressure switch-max or POC X5-
02
The connection facility can also be used as POC (proof of closure) (refer to chapter
Sequence diagrams).
No. Parameter
Gas: Input pressure switch-max / POC
1 = pressure switch-max
237 2 = POC
3 = pressure switch valve proving
4 = additional speed-dependent air pressure switch
Fuel 1 gas: Input pressure switch-max / POC
337 2 = POC
53/283

 Note
If the input is used for POC or for pressure switch, pressure switch-max can be
included in the safety loop. In that case, pressure switch-max must not be fitted
between the valves, but downstream from them.
Gas pressure switch-max
In all types of gas trains, maximum gas pressure is monitored from phase 40. If the
maximum gas pressure is exceeded, the system initiates lockout.

code code
14 0 POC open
1 POC close
21 0 Pressure switch-max: Max. gas pressure exceeded
POC: POC open (software version V02.00)
1 POC closed (software version ≤V02.00)
During the safety times, the signal from pressure switch-max is only assessed after a
certain period of time has elapsed in order to ignore the pressure shocks that occur the
moment the valves open.
No. Parameter
time
54/283

Oil pressure switch-max
In all types of oil trains, the maximum oil pressure is monitored from phase 22. If the
maximum oil pressure is exceeded when the maximum time (parameter 214) has
elapsed, or during the subsequent phases, the system initiates lockout.
No. Parameter
214 Maximum time to start release

code code
14 0 POC open
1 POC close
21 0 Pressure switch-max: Max. oil pressure exceeded
POC: POC open (software version V02.00)
1 POC closed (software version V02.00)
During the safety times, the signal from pressure switch-max is only assessed after a
certain period of time has elapsed to ignore the pressure shocks that occur the moment
the valves open.
No. Parameter
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety time
The pressure switch connection can also be used as POC (Proof of Closure) (refer to
chapter Sequence diagrams).
No. Parameter
Oil: Input pressure switch-max / POC
277 2 = POC
3 = not used
Fuel 1 oil: Input pressure switch-max / POC
377 2 = POC
3 = not used
 Note
If the input is used for POC, pressure switch-max can be included in the safety loop.
In that case, pressure switch-max must not be fitted between the valves, but after
them.
Start release oil
If the input is simultaneously used as a start release input (e.g. for an air supply
damper), the latter can be connected in series with the pressure switch.
If the input is parameterized for POC, it cannot be used as a start release input.
55/283

Additional speed-dependent air pressure switch
In this setting, an additional speed-dependent air pressure switch can be connected on

the input.
The input is evaluated depending on the actual recorded speed. The actual speed must
be identified through a speed recording process (see Chapter 13.7 Acquisition of
speed).
Bild 465en/0119
Pressure switch ON
pa
Pressure switch OFF
Standard air pressure switch pa
Speed (%)
< Minimum E.g. E.g.
load 70 80
Figure 29: Additional speed-dependent air pressure switch
No. Parameter
670 Speed air pressure switch OFF

671 Speed air pressure switch ON
The parameters 670 and 671 specify the speed limit of the VSD, from which the
connected additional air pressure switch is supervised. If the current speed is higher
than the ON threshold, the air pressure switch must deliver an ON signal. If the current
speed is lower than the OFF threshold, the air pressure switch must deliver an OFF
signal.
If the current speed is between the two speed limits, no evaluation of the air pressure
switch takes place. The input is supervised in the phases from prepurging to
postpurging and the valve proving phases. An incorrect signal leads to a shutdown.
Intermittent operation must be activated (OEM level) if the speed-dependent air
pressure switch is used as a plausibility check (resulting air pressure) for the
symmetrical speed signal of a PWM fan.
 Note!
If the input is configured to additional speed-dependent air pressure switches and the
VSD is deactivated, no evaluation of the air pressure switch signal takes place.

code code
18 0 Speed-dependent air pressure switch open
1 Speed-dependent air pressure switch closed
128 Invalid parameterization of the speed thresholds (speed air
pressure switch OFF  speed air pressure switch ON)
56/283

7.3.10 Fuel selection / reset / lockout
The fuel selection is made by an external connected switch at AGM60
The selection made is transmitted to the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit via 2 signal lines
(internal fuel selection 0 + 1).
Fuel 0 = 1, Fuel 1 = 0  Fuel 0 is selected

Fuel 0 = 0, Fuel 1 = 1  Fuel 1 is selected
Fuel 0 = 0, Fuel 1 = 0  Line interrupted
 Safety shutdown / lockout
Fuel 0 = 1, Fuel 1 = 1  Reset
Next time the burner is started up after shutdown or safety shutdown, the new fuel is
used.
After a change in fuel, any manual operation output or output specification from a
building automation and control system is deleted and automatic mode is activated so
that an automatic restart can take place with the new fuel if a heat request is present.
Exception:
The manual off function for manual output and burner off (output = 0) via the building
automation system are maintained.
Due to the required input / output functionality, the LMV26 / LMV36 has no separate
reset input.
But to have an external reset / interlock facility available, the function is provided by
double assignment of the fuel selection inputs.
For reset or interlock, the 2 fuel selection inputs of the LMV26 / LMV36 are
interconnected via a pushbutton.
Handling is subject to the same time conditions as the operating states (low  high 
low). This means that the mechanism corresponds to that of the external reset input of
the single-fuel or US version.
57/283

Type of pushbutton
When active, the fuel selection lines carry mains voltage. Ensure that the selected
pushbutton and connecting lines satisfy the respective electrical requirements.
Reset
LMV...
AGM60...
X9-04
X31-02
0
Internal fuel selection 0
1
P
X8-04

Bild 281e/0409
Figure 30: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Type of pushbutton
58/283

7.4 Digital outputs
Safety-related outputs, type SI
Using a contact feedback network, these contacts are read back by the microcomputers
and checked for their correct positions.
Non-safety-related outputs, type No-SI
These outputs are not monitored by the contact feedback network and, for this reason,
can only be used for non-safety-related actuators, or actuators made safe in some other
form (e.g. alarm).
7.4.1 Output alarm type No-SI X3–05, pin 2

LMV...
X3-05
Alarm
Bild 282/0309
Figure 31: Output alarm X3-05
Output for connection of an alarm lamp or horn.

The output is activated when the LMV26 / LMV36 is in the lockout position (phase 00).
This output can also be used to indicate start prevention.
7.4.2 Fan motor contactor type SI – X3–05, pin 1

LMV...
X3-05
Fan motor contactor

Bild 283e/1109
Figure 32: Fan motor contactor X3-05
Output for control of a fan power contactor (200 VA). In accordance with the sequence
diagrams, the fan is on in phase 22 (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).
7.4.3 Continuous fan operation – X3–05, pin 3

LMV...
Continuous fan operation

X3-05
Bild 284e/1010
Figure 33: Fan continuous purging X3-05
If continuous purging is required, the fan motor contactor must be connected to

Continuous fan operation – X3-05, pin 3. This terminal is tapped behind the unit fuse
and the safety loop (refer to chapter Continuous fan).
59/283

7.4.4 Output ignition type SI (IGNITION) X4–02
LMV...
Ignition (Z)
X4-02
Bild 285e/0409
Figure 34: Output ignition X4-02
Output for the connection of ignition transformers or electronic ignition modules.
Gas
When firing on gas, ignition is switched on just prior to the first safety time in phase 38.
The preignition time in phase 38 can be parameterized.
No. Parameter
226 Gas: Preignition time
326 Fuel 1 gas: Preignition time
Oil
When firing on oil, there is a choice between long and short preignition (as with gas
operation from phase 38).
No. Parameter
Oil: Point in time oil is ignited
281 0 = short preignition (phase 38)
1 = long preignition (with fan) (phase 22)
Fuel 1 oil: Point in time oil is ignited
381 0 = short preignition (phase 38)
When using long preignition, ignition is switched on in phase 22, together with the fan.
In the case of short preignition, the preignition time can be parameterized.
No. Parameter
266 Oil: Preignition time
366 Fuel 1 oil: Preignition time
60/283

7.4.5 Outputs fuel valves type SI V1 / V2 / V3 / PV X8–02, X7-
01, X7-02
LMV...
X8-02
Auxiliary terminal V1 for series
connection of two AC 115 V valves
Fuel valve 1 (V1)
Bild 286e/0409
Figure 35: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V1 X8-02
AGM60...
V1
V1 2
X8-02
3
N
4
PE
1
PE
2
X24-04
N
V1 3
V2
4
V1
LMV...
Protective earth (PE) 4
X8-02 3
Auxiliary terminal V1 for series
connection of two AC 115 V valves 2 1
Fuel valve 1(V1) 1 2

Bild 287e/0409 3
V3
4
5
Figure 36: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V1 X8-02
61/283

LMV...
Fuel valve 2 (V2)
X7-01
Bild 288e/0409
Figure 37: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V2 X7-01
AGM60...
V2
V2 2
X8-03
3
N
4
PE
1
PE
2
N
X24-04
V2
3
V2
4
V1
1
LMV...
2
Fuel valve 2 (V2) 3 3
X7-01
V3
2
Protective earth (PE) 1 5
Bild 289e/0409
Figure 38: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V2 X7-01
62/283

LMV...
Fuel valve V3 /
pilot valve
X7-02
Bild 290en/0916
Figure 39: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V3 / pilot valve X7-02
AGM60...
PE
X7-02
2
N
3
V3
V3
PE
1
X24-05
2
N
3
PV
1
2
LMV...
Fuel valve 3 (V3) / 3
Pilot valve (PV) 3 4
V3
X7-02
2 5
Bild 291e/0409
Figure 40: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V3 / pilot valve X7-02
Outputs for connection of the gas or oil valves, depending on the selected type of fuel
train (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).
63/283

7.4.6 Output safety valve type SI X6–03 / magnetic clutch
LMV...
Safety valve / magnetic clutch
Magnetic
X6-03
clutch
Bild 292e/1209
Figure 41: LMV26 / LMV36: Output safety valve / magnetic clutch X6-03
AGM60...
1
X6-02
2
3
1
X24-06
2
3
2
3
LMV...
V3
4
Safety valve / magnetic clutch 3 5
X6-03
2
Bild 293e/1209
Figure 42: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output safety valve / magnetic clutch X6-03
Output for connection of an oil shutoff valve / oil connection valve or safety valve for
liquefied gas. The output is connected parallel to the output for the fan.
7.4.7 Output for indication of operation X8-04 pin 2

LMV...
Indication of operation
X8-04
Bild 294e/0409
Figure 43: Output for indication of operation X8-04
Output for connection of indication of operation.
Caution!
The output is connected parallel to the fuel valve V1.
64/283

7.5 Program sequence
The program sequence is shown in the form of sequence diagrams (refer to chapter
Fuel trains application examples). Using a number of parameters, the program
sequence can be adapted to the respective application.
7.5.1 Time parameters
Using a number of time parameters, the time characteristics of the different types of fuel
trains can be matched to the requirements of the respective application.
In single-fuel operation or in dual-fuel operation, the parameters 225...299 are

assigned to fuel 0.
No. Parameter
211 Fan rump-up time
212 Maximum time to low-fire
213 Waiting time home run
214 Maximum time to start release
Max. Waiting time for detection of detector or pressure switch signal (e.g.
217
homerun, preignition)
225 Gas: Prepurge time
227 Gas: First safety time
230 Gas: Interval 1
231 Gas: Second safety time
232 Gas: Interval 2
233 Gas: Afterburn time
234 Gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
242 Gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating
243 Gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure
244 Gas: Valve proving - test space filling
245 Gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure
246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage
248 Gas: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller ON)
249 Gas: Prepurge time (OEM)
265 Oil: Prepurge time
267 Oil: First safety time
270 Oil: Interval 1
271 Oil: Second safety time
272 Oil: Interval 2
273 Oil: Afterburn time
274 Oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
284 Oil: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller ON)
288 Oil: Prepurge time (OEM)
65/283

In dual-fuel operation, the parameters 325...399 are assigned to fuel 1.
No. Parameter
325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time
327 Fuel 1 gas: First safety time
time
330 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 1
331 Fuel 1 gas: Second safety time
332 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 2
333 Fuel 1 gas: Afterburn time
334 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space filling
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure
346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage
348 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller On)
349 Gas: Prepurge time (OEM)
365 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurge time
367 Fuel 1 oil: First safety time
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults in the first and second safety time
370 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 1
371 Fuel 1 oil: Second safety time
372 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 2
373 Fuel 1 oil: Afterburn time
374 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
384 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller On)
388 Oil: Prepurge time (OEM)
Caution!
The OEM or the heating engineer must make certain that the times conform to
the standards covering the respective type of plant.
66/283

7.5.2 Valve proving
Valve proving is only active when firing on gas. Valve proving designed to detect leaking
gas valves and, if necessary, to prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being
switched on. Lockout is initiated, if required.
When performing valve proving, the gas valve on the burner side is opened first to bring
the test space to atmospheric pressure. After closing the valve, the pressure in the test
space must not exceed a certain level. Then, the gas valve on the mains side is opened
to fill the gas pipe. After closing, the gas pressure must not fall below a certain level.
Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both.

Type of valve proving can be selected via parameter 236 / 336 or 237 / 337.
Recommendation:
Perform valve proving on shutdown.
No. Parameter
switch-min
237 2 = POC
Gas: Execution-valve proving
242 Gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating
243 Gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure
244 Gas: Valve proving - test space filling
245 Gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure
Fuel 1 gas: Input pressure switch-min
336 2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min
(between fuel valve V1 and fuel valve V2)
337 2 = POC
Gas: Execution-valve proving
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space filling
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure
67/283

Caution!
If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the
gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain on
the gas valves (wear) increases.
Caution!
The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or
mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643.
It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the
gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant
application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or
prevented valve proving, the unit performs valve proving on the next startup (only when
valve proving is activated). Prepurging with valve proving is active during the startup
phase, even if it was deactivated.
Examples of aborted valve proving:

If the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min)
opens during valve proving.
Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate
(PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest = 
Patm • QLeck
QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase
PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%
of the gas inlet pressure)
Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)
V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume
and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)
tTest in s Test time
68/283

7.5.2.1. Valve proving with separate pressure switch X5-02
P
min
P
LT
Step 1: t80 – evacuation of test space.
Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to
atmospheric pressure.
Step 2: t81 – test time atmospheric pressure.

When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must
not exceed a certain level.
Step 3: t82 – filling of test space.

P LT Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space.
Bild 410e/1010
Figure 1: Valve proving with separate Step 4: t83 – test time gas pressure.
pressure switch When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must
not drop below a certain level.
Legend
t80 Evacuation of test space (parameter 242)
t81 Test time atmospheric pressure (parameter 243)
t82 Filling of test space (parameter 244)
t83 Test time gas pressure (parameter 245)
Vx Fuel valve
P LT Pressure switch – valve proving
Pmin Pressure switch-min
Input/output signal 1 (ON)
Input/output signal 0 (OFF)
Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF)
69/283

7.5.2.2. Valve proving via the pressure switch-min gas X5-01
P LT
(Pmin)
Step 1: t80 – evacuation of test space.
Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to
atmospheric pressure.
Step 2: t81 – test time atmospheric pressure.

When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space
must not exceed a certain level.
Step 3: t82 – filling of test space.

P LT Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space.
(Pmin)
Bild 411e/1010
Step 4: t83 – test time gas pressure.
Figure 2: Valve proving via gas pressure switch-
When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space
min
must not drop below a certain level.
Legend
t80 Evacuation of test space (parameter 242)
t81 Test time atmospheric pressure (parameter 243)
t82 Filling of test space (parameter 244)
t83 Test time gas pressure (parameter 245)
Vx Fuel valve
P LT Pressure switch – valve proving
Performing valve proving via gas pressure switch-min affects the program sequence as
follows (see Addendum Sequence diagram «G»):
a) Valve proving on startup:
Gas pressure switch-min (gas shortage test) is not sampled in phase 22, but during
valve proving at the end of the filling time.
b) Valve proving on shutdown/deactivated
Gas pressure switch-min is sampled at the end of preignition. For that purpose, a
new phase 39 (pressure switch-min test) is introduced and evaluation of gas
shortage is made at the end of the phase (duration of phase = filling time). In
practice, this represents an extension of preignition by the filling time, if valve
proving via gas pressure switch-min was selected.
Valve proving test can only be made via the gas pressure switch-min.
The pressure switch must be fitted between the valves.
This has an impact on the program sequence (refer to chapter Sequence diagrams).
Valve proving continues to be activated via parameters 241 and 341.
No. Parameter
Gas: Execution valve proving

Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving
70/283

7.5.2.3. Lockout phase (phase 00)
The relays of the fuel valves and the safety relay (fan) are deenergized, the alarm relay
is energized and lockout takes place. This means that phase 00 can only be quit via a
manual reset. The time of phase 00 is unlimited.
7.5.2.4. Safety phase (phase 02)
The safety phase is an intermediate phase which is completed prior to triggering

lockout. The relays of the fuel valves and the safety relay (fan) are deenergized, but
lockout does not yet take place. The alarm relay is not yet activated. If possible or
permitted, safety checks or repetition counter checks are made whose results decide on
the transition to Lockout phase or Standby. The duration of the safety phase is dynamic
(depending on the extent of testing), the maximum time being 30 seconds.
This process is aimed primarily at avoiding unwanted lockouts, e.g. resulting from EMC
problems.
7.5.3 Special functions during the program sequence

7.5.3.1. Reset / manual lockout
The LMV26 / LMV36 can be manually locked by simultaneously pressing the Info button
and any other button on the AZL2. This function enables the user to interlock the
LMV26 / LMV36 from any operating level, that is, to trigger unalterable shutdown.
Due to the system’s structure, this does not represent an Emergency OFF function.
When making a reset, the following actions are carried out:

 Alarm relay and fault display are switched off
 The lockout position is canceled
 The LMV26 / LMV36 makes a reset and then changes to standby
There are 3 choices to reset the LMV26 / LMV36.
1. Reset on the AZL2
If the unit is in the lockout position, a reset can be made by pressing the Info button for
1…3 seconds.
The function is available only when the LMV26 / LMV36 is in the lockout position.
Longer or shorter pushes on the button do not produce a reset so that the system
maintains the lockout position.

code code
167 2 Manual lockout by the AZL2
2. Resetting by pressing the button by the Internal fuel selection 1 or Internal

fuel selection 2 connection terminal on the LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit (X8-04 /
pin 1 or X9-04 / pin 2)
Due to the required input / output functionality, the LMV26 / LMV36 has no separate
control input. However, to have an external reset and manual interlock facility available,
the function is provided by double assignment of the fuel selection inputs.
For reset or interlock, the 2 fuel selection inputs of the LMV26 / LMV36 are
interconnected via a pushbutton.
71/283

Type of pushbutton When active, the fuel selection lines carry mains voltage. Ensure that the selected
pushbutton and connecting lines satisfy the respective electrical requirements.
Reset
LMV...
AGM60...
X9-04
X31-02
0
1
P
X8-04

Bild 281e/0409
Figure 44: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Type of pushbutton (X8-04 pin 1 or X9-04 pin 2)
If the unit is in the lockout position, a reset can be made by pressing the button for 1…3
seconds.
Longer or shorter pushes on the button are ignored so that the LMV26 / LMV36
maintains the lockout position.
If the unit is not in the lockout position and the reset button is pressed for 1…3 seconds,
a change to the lockout position takes place.
A push of <1 second is ignored, a push of >3 seconds leads to safety shutdown (lockout
after 30 seconds), followed by the diagnostics Invalid signal of fuel selection (error code
62 / diagnostic code 3).

code code
167 1 Manual lockout by contact
3. Resetting via the PC software ACS410
Refer to the documentation covering the PC software ACS410 (J7352).

code code
167 3 Manual lockout by PC software ACS410
72/283

7.5.3.2. Alarm upon prevention of startup
If start prevention occurs, it is shown on the display of the AZL2.

Start prevention takes place only when a heat request is delivered and when one of the
startup criteria is not fulfilled.
The time to elapse from start prevention to display on the AZL2 is set to a fixed value of
5 seconds.
In addition, it is possible to indicate preventions of startup via the alarm output. This
function can be activated per parameter.
No. Parameter
Alarm in the event of start prevention
210 0 = deactivated
1 = activated
If Alarm in the event of start prevention is activated via the alarm relay, prevention of
startup and lockout can only be distinguished via the display on the AZL2. Preventions
of startup are displayed as Err:, lockouts as Loc:.
 Note
If, in the event of prevention of startup, reset contact on the LMV26 / LMV36 (X8-04
pin 1 or X9-04-2 pin 2) is pressed, the LMV26 / LMV36 locks out manually.
The time from occurrence of prevention of startup to indication by the alarm contact
equals the time to the display on the AZL2.
73/283

7.5.3.3. Possible preventions of startup
On the normal display, error code 201 is translated to text display OFF UPr0 or OFF
UPr1 (UPr = unprogrammiert = not programmed); the numerical value appears in the
error history.

code code
201 1 No operating mode selected
OFF UPr0
or
OFF UPr1
2…3 No fuel train defined
4…7 No curve defined
8…15 Standardized speed undefined
16…31 Backup / restore was not possible
Other preventions of startup:
3 4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup
4 2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup
14 64 POC open- prevention of startup
21 64 POC open – prevention of startup (software version
V02.00)
22 1 Safety loop / burner flange open – prevention of startup
OFF S
83 # Speed error VSD
97 # Error relay supervision
0 Safety relay contacts have welded or external power supply
fed to safety relay
No. Parameter
Standardized speed
Index 0 = speed 1
Index 1 = speed 2 (internal monitoring)
642
Fuel 1:
Index 2 = fuel 1: Speed 1
Index 3 = fuel 1: Speed 2 (internal monitoring)
935 Absolute speed
936 Standardized speed
74/283

7.5.3.4. Repetition counter
Repetition counters are available for different types of errors. They are used to set the
number of errors permitted until lockout occurs. The last error initiates lockout. When
setting the number of errors to 3, for example, a repetition (restart) takes place after the
first 3 errors, and after the third error, the LMV26 / LMV36 initiates lockout.
 Note
Setting 16 means an infinite number of repetitions = no lockout.
Functions with adjustable repetition counter
No. Parameter
194 Repetition limit no flame at the end of safety time
1 = no repetition
Recharging time:
196 Repetition limit air pressure failure
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
3 = 2 repetitions
Recharging time:
199 Repetitions limit value - actuators
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
3 = 2 repetitions
Repetition limit safety loop
1 = no repetition
215 16 = constant repetition
Recharging time:
Every 24 hours
Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
1 = no repetition
223
323
Recharging time:
Repetition limit value loss of flame
340 2 = 1 repetition
280
380 Recharging time:
75/283

code code
2 1 No flame at the end of the first safety time
3 0 Air pressure
7 0 Loss of flame
No minimum gas / oil pressure
22 0 Safety loop / burner flange open
OFF S
82 # Error during VSD’s speed standardization
83 # Speed error VSD
85 # Referencing error ones actuators
86 # Error fuel actuator
87 # Error air actuator
If the adjustable repetition counter limits are changed, the actual counter is recharged
only when the associated recharging time is reached: After power-on or after a reset.
 Note
If immediate recharging shall be enforced, the LMV26 / LMV36 can be manually
locked and then reset.
Functions with fixed repetition counters

These counters cannot be set.
Settings
Meaning
Basic setting
Number of repetitions in the event of error:
 Relay
 Relay control
2
Recharging time:
End of Operation phase
Number of repetition in the event of internal error
5
Recharging time:
After 24 hours of operation
Error Diagnostic Meaning

code code
95...98 # Error relay supervision
99…100 # Internal error relay control
76/283

7.5.3.5. Start without prepurging (as per EN 676)
When using valve proving and 2 fuel valves of class A, prepurging is not required
(conforming to EN 676).
Prepurging can be deactivated via parameter.
No. Parameter
Gas: Prepurging
222 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging
322 0 = inactive
1 = active
When prepurging is activated, it is performed in accordance with the adjusted prepurge

time.
If not activated, it is nevertheless performed of the following conditions apply:
 Alterable lockout position
 After an off time of >24 hours
 In the event of a power failure (power-on)
 In the event of shutdown due to an interruption of gas supply (safety shutdown)
No. Parameter
225 Gas: Prepurge time
325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time
77/283

7.5.3.6. Gas shortage program
Valve proving via gas pressure switch-min (parameter 236 = 2)
Since gas pressure switch-min is not located between the fuel valves, the gas shortage
test cannot be made in phase 22. Therefore, when performing valve proving on startup,
the gas shortage test is made at the end of the filling time (end of phase 82).
With no valve proving on startup, the gas shortage test is made directly before first
safety time is started (end of phase 39).
No. Parameter
switch-min
Standard valve proving (parameter 236 = 1)
If the gas pressure is too low, startup is aborted in phase 22
No. Parameter
236
246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage
346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage
If gas shortage occurs with the last of the parameterized number of start attempts, the
system initiates lockout.
No. Parameter
223 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min
Recharging time:
In that case, the LMV26 / LMV36 makes with gas shortage program a selectable
number of start attempts until lockout occurs.
The waiting time from one start attempt to the next is doubled each time, starting from a
waiting time that can be parameterized.
78/283

7.5.3.7. Program stop function
To simplify the burner settings in connection with commissioning and service work, the
program sequence of the LMV26 / LMV36 can be stopped at the following positions:
1) Air damper in prepurge position 24
2) Ignition position 36
3) Interval 1 44
4) Interval 2 52
The program stops are integrated in the setting sequence when the plant is
commissioned (refer to chapter Air-fuel ratio curves – settings and commissioning).
After the initial settings, program stops can be activated on the parameter level.
No. Parameter
Program stop
0 = deactivated
1 = prepurge position (phase 24)
208
2 = ignition position (phase 36)
3 = interval 1 (phase 44)
The program stop function is maintained until manually deactivated. If the LMV26 /
LMV36 halts at one of the program stops, a message appears on the display of the
AZL2.
Figure 45: Message in the case of program stop
Example: c:204 alternating with d:24 corresponding to program stop in prepurge

position.
7.5.3.8. LMV36.300A2 only: Forced intermittent operation (< 24

hours)
When forced intermittent operation is activated, the unit will shut down for a moment
after 23 hours and 45 minutes of uninterrupted operation, and will then restart
automatically.
Forced intermittent operation is activated by default.
No. Parameter
Gas: Forced intermittent operation
239 0 = inactive
1 = active
Oil: Forced intermittent operation
279 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 gas. Forced intermittent operation
339 0 = inactive
1 = active
379 Fuel 1 oil: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
79/283

7.5.3.9. Low-fire shutdown
To prevent the boiler from being shut down under full or nearly full load conditions,
electronic air-fuel ratio control can run the burner to the low-fire position first when there
is no more request for heat (refer to chapter End of operating position).
7.5.3.10. Continuous fan
With burners that can be damaged by heat (e.g. several burners using the same
combustion chamber), continuous purging may be required. In that case, the fan
operates continuously in all phases.
For that purpose, the fan motor contactor is to be connected to X3-05, pin 3, tapped
after the unit fuse and the safety loop.
For checking the air pressure switch, a pressure switch relief valve must be connected
to fan output X3-05, pin 1. When output X3-05, pin 1, is activated, the relief valve diverts
the fan pressure to the air pressure switch and, when deactivated, ensures that no
pressure is fed to the switch.
Example:
LMV...
X3-05
X3-02
Bild 296e/1010
Figure 46: Continuous fan
80/283

7.5.3.11. Test function for burner approval – loss-of-flame test
(TÜV test)
The purpose of this test is to verify the detection time required in the event of loss of
flame when applying for burner approval. When starting the test, the fuel valves are shut
to determine the time (resolution of 0.2 seconds) until the LMV26 / LMV36 detects loss
of flame.
Procedure:
 Determine the burner output at which the test shall be made, using parameter 133
(fuel 0) or parameter 134 (fuel 1). If these parameters are not set, the test is carried
out at the current output of the system
 Start the test by entering the value of 1 for parameter 124.
If the burner’s output for the test is set (parameter 133 or 134), the LMV26 / LMV36
is driven to that output level first. To ensure this function, the presetting of
parameter 121 (manual output) is used. This cancels any manual output that was
previously active
 Now, the LMV26 / LMV36 shuts the fuel valves, leading to loss of flame
 The evaluation is made by the LMV26 / LMV36 by measuring the time the system
requires from fuel valve shutdown until loss of flame is detected.
Then, the measured value is available as a diagnostic code in connection with error
C:7 (loss of flame)
The resolution is 0.2 seconds.
Example:
The display of C:7 D:10 means that the time required from valve shutdown to
detection of loss of flame is 2 seconds (D:10 corresponding 10 x 0.2 seconds).
When the test is successfully completed, parameter 124 is reset to 0. If unsuccessful, a

negative value is delivered for diagnostic purposes and error code 150 is entered.
-1 = invalid phase (test possible in phase 60 only) – message displayed: C:150 D:1
-2 = default output < minimum output – message displayed: C:150 D:2
-3 = default output > maximum output – message displayed: C:150 D:3
-4 = manual abortion (no error, start variable was manually reset to 0) – message
displayed: C:150 D:4
-5 = timeout with TÜV test (no loss of flame within 50 seconds after valves were
shut) – lockout: C:150 D:5
Values previously set for the burner’s output at which the test shall be made (parameter
133 or 134) remain stored.
No. Parameter
Manual output
121
Undefined = automatic operation
Loss of flame test (TÜV test) starting (parameterized on 1)
124 (switch off the fuel valves  loss of flame)
Error diagnostic via negative value (refer to error code 150)
Default output at TÜV test
Invalid = TÜV test at active output
133
20...100 = low-fire...high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
P1...P3 = stage 1...stage 3
Fuel 1: Default output at TÜV test
Invalid = TÜV test at active output
134
20...100 = low-fire...high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
81/283

7.5.3.12. Postpurging in the lockout position
Parameter 190 can be used to move the actuators (actuators or VSD) to the postpurge
position while they are in the lockout position.
No. Parameter
190 Postpurging in lockout position
0 = deactivate (no-load position)
1 = active (postpurge position)
When active, the Alarm in the event of start prevention function (parameter
210) is only possible to a limited extent!
 Note!
The LMV26 / LMV36 simply moves the actuators (actuators or VSD) to the postpurge
position. A fan or VSD release contact cannot be controlled, as the alarm relay of the
LMV26 / LMV36 cuts off the power supply to the outputs. With the Alarm in the event
of start prevention function, an external circuit that may be present for controlling the
fan / VSD release contact for postpurging in the lockout position is activated via start
prevention in standby mode.
LMV...
K2 K3
Fan continuous purging
K1
X3-05 L
Fan normal operation
Bild 429e/0913
K1 K2 K3
N N N
Figure 47: Application example of postpurging in the lockout position with fan but without VSD
The duration of postpurging in the lockout position can be set via the delay time of K3.
Attention!
When the Postpurging in the lockout position function is used, the fan may only
be powered via a contactor and must not be connected directly to LMV26 /
LMV36 (X3-05 pin 1)!
Siemens Micromaster 440 Standardization

of speed
22
+24 V 9 X74 pin 1 DC 24 V external
5
K1
K2 K3
21
LMV... + 3 X74 pin 3 VSD control DC 0/1...10 V

Setpoint 0...10 V
Fan continuous purging 4 X74 pin 2 signal reference
X3-05
Fan normal operation

28
Bild 430e/0913
K1 K2 K3 K1
X3-05 pin 1 fan motor contactor

N N N
Figure 48: Application example of postpurging in the lockout position with fan and VSD release contact
The duration of postpurging in the lockout position can be set via the delay time of K3.
Attention!
When the Postpurging in the lockout position function is used, the fan may only
be powered via a contactor and must not be connected directly to LMV26 /
LMV36 (X3-05 pin 1)!
82/283

7.6 Fuel trains (application examples)
Gas direct ignition
(Operating mode 1, 7, 14, 19,
Program G Direct ignition
28)
1) V1 1) V2
P P P
min LT max
Figure 49: Gas direct ignition
Gas pilot ignition 1

(Operating mode 2, 8, 15, 20)
Program Gp1 Gas pilot
SV 1) V1 1) V2
PV
Figure 50: Gas pilot ignition 1
Gas pilot ignition 2

(Operating mode 3, 9, 16, 21,
Program Gp2 Gas pilot
29) SV 1) V1 1) V2
P P ´P
min LT max
SA
PV
Figure 51: Gas pilot ignition 2
83/283

Fuel valve control Gas (always modulate)
Legend for fuel trains:
V2 *) Not used
1) For the valve proving function, the

pressure switch-min is
Gp2
V1
located between the fuel valve

V1 / V2
LO Light oil
No Normally Open
P LT Valve proving
Pmax Pressure switch-max
Pilot ignition 1

PV Pilot valve
SA Actuator
SV Safety valve (outdoors)
TSAx Safety time
V Fuel valve
Bild 300e/0309
Figure 52: Gas – fuel valve control
84/283

Light oil direct ignition,
multistage
(Operating mode 5, 17) 1-stage burner
Program LO
V1
P
min
Figure 53: Light oil direct ignition, multistage
Program LO
V2
V1
P
min
Figure 54: Light oil direct ignition, 2-stage
Program LO
V3
V2
V1
P
min
Figure 55: Light oil direct ignition, 3-stage
85/283

Light oil direct ignition,
modulating
(Operating mode 4, 22) Modulating burner (without shutdown facility for adjustable head)
Program LO
V1
P
min
1) 1)
P
max M
Figure 56: Light oil direct ignition, modulating
(Operating mode 4, 22) Modulating burner (with shutdown facility for adjustable head)
Program LO
V1
P
min
1)
P
max M
Figure 57: Light oil ignition, modulating
Fuel valve control Light oil (transformer for direct ignition)

Stage operation
1) Series connection of two DC 115 V

V3
valves
V2
Air damper MIN

LO Light oil
position
No Normally Open
LK Air damper
P LT Valve proving
LO

PV Pilot valve
SA Actuator
SV Safety valve
Figure 58: Light oil direct ignition - fuel valve control
(outdoors)
TSAx Safety time
V Fuel valve
Z Ignition
86/283

Dual fuel burner gas/ light oil
with gas pilot ignition

Program GP2
P V1-Gas V2-Gas P
P SA
min max
Gas
PV-Gas
(Operating mode 10, 11)

Program LOgp
V2-oil
V1-oil
SV-oil
Light oil
Figure 59: Dual fuel burner gas / light oil with gas pilot ignition
Fuel valve control Light oil (with gas pilot ignition)

Multistage operation

V2
MAX
MIN pressure switch-min is
Operation
V1 / V2
TSA1
TSA2
LO Light oil
No Normally Open
V2
LK Air damper
P LT Valve proving
V1

PV Pilot valve
PV
V3
SA Actuator
Bild 308e/0114
SV Safety valve
Figure 60: Light oil with gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control (outdoors)
TSAx Safety time
V Fuel valve
Z Ignition
87/283

Light oil direct ignition
modulating with 2 fuel valves
(Operating mode 12) Modulating burner (without shutdown facility for adjustable head)
Program LO-2V
V1
P
min 1)
V2
1)
P
max M
Figure 61: Light oil direct ignition, modulating, without shutdown facility for adjustable head
(Operating mode 12) Modulating burner (with shutdown facility for adjustable head)
Program LO-2V
V1
P
min
V2
P
max M
Figure 62: Light oil direct ignition, modulating, with shutdown facility for adjustable head
Fuel valve control Light oil (transformer for direct ignition)
1) Series connection of two DC 115 V

valves (each requiring approx. 25 VA
control power)
LO-2V
LO Light oil
No Normally Open
LK Air damper
P LT Valve proving
Figure 63: Gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control PV Pilot valve
SA Actuator
TSAx Safety time
V Fuel valve
Z Ignition
88/283

Dual fuel burner gas / light oil
with gas pilot ignition with 2
fuel valves

Program GP2
P V1-Gas V2-Gas P
P SA
min max
Gas
PV-Gas
(Operating mode 13)

Program LOgp-2V
SV-Oil V1-Oil V2-Oil
Light oil
Figure 64: Dual fuel burner gas / light oil with gas pilot ignition with 2 fuel valves
Fuel valve control Light oil (with gas pilot ignition)

Operation

TSA1
TSA2

pressure switch-min is
V2

V1 / V2
V1
LO Light oil
No Normally Open
LK Air damper
PV
V3
Bild 313e/0114 P LT Valve proving

Figure 65: Light oil – gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control Pmax Pressure switch-max
PV Pilot valve
SA Actuator
TSAx Safety time
V Fuel valve
Z Ignition
7.7 Sequence diagrams

The phase numbers given in the sequence diagrams can be read from the following
process data:
No. Parameter
961 Phase (state for external module and display)
89/283

7.7.1 Gas direct ignition «G», «G mod», «G mod pneu»
t1
5s 30 s
RAST plug Function / Inputs

pin number
X3-04 pin 1/2
X5-03 pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
pin 2 / pin 3/4
X10-06 pin 1/2
X3-02 pin 1/2 LP p
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 P
X9-04 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 POC *)
RAST plug Function / Outputs

pin number
X3-05 pin 1 M
X4-02 pin 2/3 Z
X6-03 pin 2/3
X8-02 pin 1/3 V1
X7-01 pin 2/3 V2
X7-02 pin 2/3
X3-05 pin 2 AL
Fuel
X54
0°
X53
Air
0°
X74
0°
Figure 66: Program for gas direct ignition (G), (G mod), (G mod pneu)
90/283

7.7.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 «Gp1», «Gp1 mod», «Gp1 mod pneu»
t1
5s 30 s
RAST plug
Function / inputs
pin number
X3-04 pin 1/2
X5-03 pin 1/4 R (ON)
X10-05
pin 2 / pin 3/4
X10-06 pin 1/2
X3-02 pin 1/2 LP p
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 P
X9-04 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 POC *)
RAST plug
Function / outputs
pin number
X3-05 pin 1 M
X4-02 pin 2/3 Z
X6-03 pin 2/3
X8-02 pin 1/3 V1
X7-01 pin 2/3 V2
X7-02 pin 2/3
X3-05 pin 2 AL
Fuel
X54
0°
X53
Air
0°
X74
0°
Figure 67: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp1), (Gp1 mod), (Gp1 mod pneu)
91/283

7.7.3 Gas pilot ignition 2 «Gp2», «Gp2 mod», «Gp2 mod pneu»
t1
5s 30 s
RAST plug
pin number Function / inputs
X3-04 pin 1/2
X5-03 pin 1/4 R (ON)

X10-05
pin 2 / pin 3/4
X10-06 pin 1/2
X3-02 pin 1/2 LP p
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-01 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 P
X9-04 pin 2/3 P
X5-02 pin 2/3 POC *)
RAST plug
Function / outputs
pin number
X3-05 pin 1 M
X4-02 pin 2/3 Z
X6-03 pin 2/3
X8-02 pin 1/3 V1
X7-01 pin 2/3 V2
X7-02 pin 2/3
X3-05 pin 2 AL
Fuel
X54
0°
X53
Air
0°
X74
0°
Figure 68: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp2), (Gp2 mod), (Gp2 mod pneu)
92/283

7.7.4 Light oil direct ignition «Lo», «Lo mod», «Lo 2-stage»,
«Lo 3-stage»
t1
5s 30 s
RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number
X3-04 Pin 1/2
X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)
X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p
X5-01 Pin 2/3 P
X5-02 Pin 2/3 P
X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)
RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number
X3-05 Pin 1 M
X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z
X6-03 Pin 2/3
X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1
X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2
X7-02 Pin 2/3
X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel
X54
0°
X53
Air
0°
X74
0°
Figure 69: Program for light oil direct ignition (Lo), (Lo mod), (Lo 2-stage), (Lo 3-stage)
93/283

7.7.5 Light oil pilot ignition «LoGp» «LoGp mod» «LoGp 2
stage»
t1
5s 30 s
RAST plug
Function / Inputs
Pin number
X3-04 Pin 1/2
X5-03 Pin 1/4 R (ON)
X10-05
Pin 2 / Pin 3/4
X10-06 Pin 1/2
X3-02 Pin 1/2 LP p
X5-01 Pin 2/3 P
X5-02 Pin 2/3 P
X5-02 Pin 2/3 POC *)
RAST plug
Function / Outputs
Pin number
X3-05 Pin 1 M
X4-02 Pin 2/3 Z
X6-03 Pin 2/3
X8-02 Pin 1/3 V1
X7-01 Pin 2/3 V2
X7-02 Pin 2/3
X3-05 Pin 2 AL
Fuel
X54
0°
X53
Air
0°
X74
0°
Figure 70: Program light pilot ignition «LoGp» «LoGp mod» «LoGp 2 stage»
94/283

7.7.6 Legend to the sequence diagrams
 Note
Not all phases, times, indices, abbreviations and symbols appear in the
individual sequence diagrams or are needed there!
Phase numbers
00 Lockout phase
02 Safety phase
10 Home run
12 Standby (stationary)
22 Fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON
24 Air damper  prepurge position
30 Prepurging
35 Fan  ignition speed
36 Air damper  ignition position
38 Preignition ignition = ON
39 Test pressure switch-min
40 Fuel valve = ON
42 Ignition = OFF
44 Interval 1
50 Second safety time
52 Interval 2
60 Operation 1 (stationary)
62 Operation 2 (air damper  low-fire position)
70 Afterburn time
71 Fan  postpurge speed
72 Air damper  Rated load position
74 Postpurge time
78 Postpurge time
79 Fan  standby speed
80 Evacuation of test space
81 Test time atmospheric pressure
82 Filling of test space
83 Test time gas pressure
90 Gas shortage waiting time
Valve proving is performed depending on the parameter settings:

Simultaneously with the prepurge time and/or the afterburn time.
Times
TSA1 1st safety time

TSA2 2nd safety time
t1 Prepurge time
t3 Postpurge time
t8 Postpurge time
t13 Afterburn time
t44 Interval 1
t52 Interval 2
95/283

Indices
1) Parameter: Short/long prepurge time for oil only

Short/long oil pump – ON – time
2) Only with valve proving during startup
3) Parameter: With/without alarm in the event of start prevention
4) If signal is faulty in the startup phase, phase 10 is next, otherwise phase 70
5) Maximum time safety phase, then lockout
6) Time from occurrence of start prevention to signaling
7) Only in case of valve proving during startup (valve proving via pressure
switch-min)
8) Only in case of startup without valve proving (valve proving via pressure
switch -min)
9) Inverse logic in case of valve proving via pressure switch-min
10) Parameter 276: Oil: Input oil pressure min
1 = active from phase 38
11) Only with fuel train Lo and 2 fuel valves
12) Parameter 223: Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min in connection
with gas shortage program parameter 246 (phase 90)
1 = no repetition
13) Maximum drop-in/response time for air pressure switch
14) Alternative to valve proving
15) Alternative to pressure switch-max or POC
Abbreviations
AL Alarm
FS Flame signal
GM Fan motor contactor
LP Air pressure switch
M Fan motor
P LT Pressure switch for valve proving
POC Proof of closure
PV Pilot valve
R Temperature or pressure controller
SB Safety limiter
SK Safety loop
STB Safety limit thermostat
SV Safety valve
WM Water shortage
V1 Fuel valve V1
V2 Fuel valve V2
VP Combustion pressure switch
Z Ignition transformer
SA Actuator
SA-K Low-fire position of actuator
SA-N Postpurge position of actuator
SA-R Home position of actuator
SA-V Rated load position of actuator
SA-Z Ignition load position of actuator
96/283

Symbols
Permissible position range
In Standby mode: Actuator is allowed to travel within the permissible

position range, but is always driven to the home position; must be in the
home position for phase changes
0°/10% Position as supplied (0°)

90°/100% Actuator fully open (90°)

*) Alternative to pressure switch-max

**) Only with valve proving via pressure switch-min
97/283

8 AGM60
8.1 LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and one fuel
actuator
AGM60...
LMV...
SQN1...
1
SQM3...
2
3
AIR X53
Air actuator 4
ACT1_OUT_A
ACT1_OUT_B
5
ACT1_IN_A
6
ACT1_IN_B
1
2
3
Fuel actuator FUEL X54 4
ACT0_OUT_A
ACT0_OUT_B
5
ACT0_IN_A
6
ACT0_IN_B
SQN1...
Bild 314e/1010 SQM3...
Figure 71: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and one fuel actuator
8.2 LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and two fuel

actuators
AGM60...
SQN1...
SQM3... 1
2
3
ACT0_OUT_A
4
ACT0_OUT_B
5
ACT0_IN_A
6
ACT0_IN_B
LMV... 1
SQN1... 2
1
SQM3... ACT0_OUT_A
3
4
2 ACT0_OUT_B
5
3 ACT0_IN_A
AIR X53
Air actuator 4
ACT1_OUT_A
ACT0_IN_B
6
ACT1_OUT_B
5
ACT1_IN_A
SQN1...
6
ACT1_IN_B
SQM3...
1 1
2 2
FUEL X54
3 3
Fuel actuator 4 4
5 5
6 6
Bild 398e/1010 AGV60.50
Figure 72: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and two fuel actuator
98/283

8 AGM60 17.12.2018
8.3 Connecting cable between AGM60 and LMV26 /
LMV36 (AGV60.50 cable)
This cable is required when, due to the selected type of fuel train (refer to chapter
Selection of operating mode), 2 fuel actuators are needed.
For that, the 2 fuel actuators must be connected to terminals X54a and X54b of the
AGM60 The AGV60.50 cable is required for making the electrical connection between
the 2 fuel actuators and the LMV26 / LMV36.
If only 1 fuel actuator is used, it must be connected directly to the LMV26 / LMV36.
Connection plug assignment of cable:

1 = pink or alternatively red
2 = white or alternatively black
3 = brown
4 = grey
5 = yellow
6 = green
99/283

8 AGM60 17.12.2018
9 Selection of operating mode
To facilitate straightforward adaptation of the LMV26 / LMV36 to different types of
burners, the LMV26 / LMV36 offers automatic configuration of the operating mode. This
means that – derived from parameter 201 / 301 (fuel 1) – the most important settings of
configurations relating to the operating mode are made automatically. Very often in that
case, the only manual settings to be made are those for the fuel-air ratio control system.
After selection of the operating mode, parameters that are not required will be hidden
(e.g. oil parameters when firing on gas).
No. Parameter
Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators, etc.)
-- = undefined (delete curves)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
12 = Lo mod 2 fuel valves
13 = LoGp mod 2 fuel valves
14 = G mod pneu without actuator
15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
201
17 = Lo 2-stage without actuator
19 = G mod gas actuator only
20 = Gp1 mod gas actuator only
22 = Lo mod oil actuator only
23 = Ho mod separate circulation control ¹)
24 = Ho 2-stage separate circulation control ¹)
25 = Ho mod without circulation control ¹)
26 = Ho 2-stage without circulation control ¹)
28 = G mod mech air actuator only
29 = Gp2 mod mech air actuator only
¹) Selected operating mode is not released for the LMV26 / LMV36.

With select: Error code 210 diagnostic code 0
100/283

9 Selection of operating mode 17.12.2018
No. Parameter
Fuel 1: Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, actuators,
etc.)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
301 15 = Gp1 mod pneu without actuator
23 = HO mod with circulation control ¹)
24 = HO 2-stage with circulation control ¹)
25 = HO mod without circulation control ¹)
26 = HO 2-stage without circulation control ¹)
27 = HO 3-stage without circulation control ¹)
28 = G mod mech only air actuator
29 = Gp2 mod mech only air actuator

101/283

Feedback signal
Operating mode
parameter 201 /
Fuel actuator
Fuel-air ratio
Air actuator
Description
Fuel train
control
VSD
301
Modulating Gas direct ignition, electronic modulating ratio control.

1 G mod ● ● ●
electronic Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, electronic modulating ratio control.
2 Gp1 mod ● ● ●
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, electronic modulating ratio control.
3 Gp2 mod ● ● ●
Modulating Oil direct ignition, electronic modulating ratio control.
4 Lo mod ● ● ●
Oil direct ignition, electronic 2-stage ratio control.
5 Lo 2-stage 2-stage ● ●
Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Oil direct ignition, electronic 3-stage ratio control.
6 Lo 3-stage 3-stage ● ●
Modulating Gas direct ignition, pneumatic modulating ratio control.
7 G mod pneu ●
pneumatic Optional with VSD.
Gp1 mod Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, pneumatic modulating ratio control.
8 ●
pneu pneumatic Optional with VSD.
Gp2 mod Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, pneumatic modulating ratio control.
9 ●
pneu pneumatic Optional with VSD.
Modulating Oil pilot ignition, electronic modulating ratio control.
10 LoGp mod ● ● ●
Oil pilot ignition, electronic 2-stage ratio control.
11 LoGp 2-stage 2-stage ● ●
Lo mod 2 fuel Modulating Oil direct ignition, 2 fuel valves, electronic modulating ratio control.
12 ● ● ●
valves electronic Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
LoGp mod 2 Modulating Oil pilot ignition, 2 fuel valves, electronic modulating ratio control.
13 ● ● ●
fuel valves electronic Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
G mod pneu
Modulating Gas direct ignition, without actuator, pneumatic modulating ratio
14 without
pneumatic control. Optional with VSD.
actuator
Gp1 mod
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, without actuator, pneumatic modulating ratio
15 pneu without
actuator
Gp2 mod
Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, without actuator, pneumatic modulating ratio
16 pneu without
actuator
Lo 2-stage
Oil direct ignition, without actuator, electronic 2-stage ratio control.
17 without 2-stage ●
actuator
Lo 3-stage
Oil direct ignition, without actuator, electronic 3-stage ratio control.
18 without 3-stage ●
actuator
G mod only Modulating Gas direct ignition, only gas actuator. modulating ratio control.
19 ● ●
gas actuator electronic Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
Gp1 mod only Modulating Gas pilot ignition 1, only gas actuator. modulating ratio control.
20 ● ●
Gp2 mod only Modulating Gas pilot ignition 2, only gas actuator. modulating ratio control.
21 ● ●
Lo mod only Modulating Oil direct ignition, only oil actuator. modulating ratio control.
22 ● ●
oil actuator electronic Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
102/283

Feedback signal
Operating mode
parameter 201 /
Fuel actuator
Fuel-air ratio
Air actuator
Description
Fuel train
control
VSD
301
23 Ho mod Modulating ● ● ● Heavy oil direct ignition, with circulation control, electronic
separate electronic modulating ratio control.
circulation Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
control ¹)
24 Ho 2 stage 2-stage ● ● Heavy oil direct ignition, with circulation control, electronic 2-stage
separate ratio control.
control ¹)
25 Ho mod Modulating ● ● ● Heavy oil direct ignition, without circulation control, electronic
without electronic modulating ratio control.
control ¹)
26 Ho 2 stage 2-stage ● ● Heavy oil direct ignition, without circulation control, electronic 2-
without stage ratio control.
control ¹)
27 Ho 3 stage 3-stage ● ● Heavy oil direct ignition, without circulation control, electronic 3-
without stage ratio control.
control ¹)
28 G mod mech Modulating ● ● Gas direct ignition, only air actuator, mechanical modulating ratio
only air mechanical control.
actuator Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
29 Gp2 mod Modulating ● ● Gas pilot ignition 2, only air actuator, mechanical modulating ratio
mech only air mechanical control.
actuator Optional with VSD with speed feedback signal
(Also refer to chapter Fuel trains)
The VSD can be used with any of the operating modes (refer to chapter VSD).
No. Parameter
Activation of VSD / PWM fan
0 = deactivated
542
1 = activated
2 = activated (no repetition)
 Note
For configuration of the analog output when the VSD is activated, refer to chapter
Load output X74 pin 3!
9.1 Deleting curves

To delete curves, the operating mode must be set to undefined «--». In that case, only
the fuel curves are deleted, the direction of rotation or the reference position of the
actuators is not changed.
103/283

10 Connection to load controllers
The LMV26 / LMV36 can be connected to different load controllers. Heat request and
the required burner output are determined in accordance with the priorities of the
different load sources.
10.1 Load controller-on contact X5-03, pin 1

This contact is given priority over all load controller sources. A heat request can only be
made when this contact is closed. The contact is safety-related and can also be used in
connection with load controllers featuring an integrated temperature limiter function.
10.2 External load controller via contacts X5-03, pin

2 / pin 3
The heat request is delivered via pin 1. Modulation of burner output is effected via pin 2
and 3. Here, a differentiation is made between modulating and multistage operation
(refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).
Modulating operation X5-03 (OPEN pin 3 / CLOSE pin 2)
If input Open is active, the burner’s output is increased. If input Close is active, the
burner’s output is decreased. If none of the inputs is active, the burner’s output is not
changed.
The rate of integration is 32 seconds for changing the output from low-fire to high-fire
(parameter 544), that is from 20 % to 100 %, or vice versa.
Output integration always takes place in the operating position.
200 ms is the shortest positioning step that is securely detected.
LMV...
Controller
L L
X5-03
Load controller (LR) (ON / OFF) Controller ON
Bild 316e/1010
Figure 73: Modulating operation X5-03
Minimum positioning step in modulating operation
To avoid unnecessary positioning steps of the actuators when the input signal varies, it
is possible to set a minimum step for the preselected output. This means that the output
in the LMV26 / LMV36 is readjusted only when the change in output exceeds the
minimum positioning step.
No. Parameter
123.2 Minimum output positioning step: Output external load controller contacts
104/283

10 Connection to load controllers 17.12.2018
Multistage operation X5-03 (stage 2, pin 3 / stage 3, pin 2)
In multistage operation, 1 or 2 thermostats can be connected to activate the different

burner stages. Multistage operation is possible only when firing on oil.
If neither input Stage 2 nor input Stage 3 is active, the burner switches to Stage 1.
If input Stage 2 becomes active, the burner switches to the second stage.
If input Stage 3 becomes active, the burner switches to the third stage. In that case,
input Stage 2 can be active or inactive. The third stage can only be activated with 3-
stage operation.
LMV...
L
Load controller (LR) (OPEN)
X5-03
ON/OFF
Load controller (LR) (CLOSED)
Load controller (LR) (ON/OFF)
Bild 317e/0913
Figure 74: 2-stage operation X5-03
LMV...
L
Load controller (LR) (OPEN)
X5-03
ON/OFF
Bild 318e/0913
Figure 75: 3-stage operation X5-03
Shifting multistage operation (OPEN pin 3 / CLOSE pin 2)
Using a simple thermostat, a modulating burner can be operated in shifting 2-stage

mode. In that case, there must be a firm connection between terminal CLOSE and the
live conductor (L), and terminal OPEN must be connected to the thermostat or the load
controller.
If OPEN is inactive, the active CLOSE terminal drives the burner to low-fire.
If OPEN becomes active, priority is given over terminal CLOSE so that the output is
increased by driving the burner to high-fire.
LMV...
L
X5-03
Load controller (LR) (OPEN) ON/OFF

7546z203e/0913
Figure 76: Shifting multistage operation (OPEN pin 3 / CLOSE pin 2)
105/283

To provide simple thermostatic control of a dual-fuel system, evaluation of load
controller inputs for multistage operation can be set via parameter 205. This has no
impact on modulating operation.
No. Parameter
Function Load controller contacts, multistage
205 0 = standard
1 = stages interchanged
Modulating Standard Stages interchanged

X5-03 pin 1 ON/OFF Low-fire Low-fire
X5-03 pin 2 Close Signal close Signal close
X5-03 pin 3 Open Signal open Signal open
2-stage Standard Stages interchanged

X5-03 pin 1 ON/OFF Stage 1 Stage 1
X5-03 pin 2 Close Stage 2 Stage 1
X5-03 pin 3 Open Stage 2 Stage 2
3-stage Standard Stages interchanged

X5-03 pin 1 ON/OFF Stage 1 Stage 1
X5-03 pin 2 Close Stage 3 Stage 2
X5-03 pin 3 Open Stage 2 Stage 3
10.3 Default output via building automation – X92

To control the LMV26 / LMV36, building automation system can predefine an output via
a bus system.
Building automation system is connected to the LMV26 / LMV36 via the X92 interface.
Burner startup can take place only when contact X5-03 pin 1 is closed (load controller
ON / OFF).
Further information on connecting the building automation system to the LMV26 /
LMV36 can be found in this documentation in section Connection to superordinated
systems and the user documentation Modbus (A7541).
Minimum positioning step
To avoid unnecessary positioning steps of the actuators when the predefined target
output varies, a minimum positioning step can be set. The LMV26 / LMV36 unit changes
the output only if the change in target output exceeds the minimum positioning step. The
minimum positioning step only becomes active in modulating operation.
No. Parameter
123.0 Minimum output positioning step: Output building automation
106/283

Behavior in the event the building automation and control system fails
If the LMV26 / LMV36 receives no more data from building automation, it will deliver the
output set with parameter 148 / 149.
The time that elapses until communication breakdown is detected can be set via
parameter 142.
No. Parameter
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown
Setting value:
0 = deactivated
1…7200 s
148 Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with building
automation
Setting values:
For modulating operation, the setting range is as follows:
0…19.9 = burner off
20…100 = 20…100% burner output (20 = low-fire position)
For multistage operation, use the following settings:

0 = burner OFF
Invalid = no output predefined by the building automation system in the event

of communication breakdown
Default setting: Invalid

149 Fuel 1: Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with
building automation
Setting values:

0 = burner OFF

Setting choices:
a) Set output specification in parameter 148 / 149 to undefined (--).
In the event communication breaks down, the last valid preselected output is
maintained. The next load controller activated in accordance with the priority (refer
to chapter Prioritization of load controller sources) ensures control from this output
position.
b) Set default output via parameter 148 / 149 to 0, 20…100% or multistage
If communication breaks down, the output requested by the building automation
system is set invalid and the output set via parameter 148 / 149 is delivered.
 Note
In that case, outputs via load controllers with a priority lower than that of the
building automation system cannot be delivered.
107/283

10.4 Manual output
A manual output can be set with the Normal display of the AZL2 or via the PC software
ACS410.
Manual output via the AZL2
Manual output can be activated or adjusted by pressing the F button for at least 1
second and by pressing the + or – button.
Output 0 means Manually OFF.
As long as the manual output is active, the output appearing on the normal display
flashes.
To deactivate and to change to automatic operation, press ESC for 3 seconds.
If Manually OFF is activated, it is stored via mains OFF.
On power return, the burner assumes the Manually OFF position (OFF flashing) (refer to
chapter Operation).
Fuel changeover resets the manual output to Invalid.
Exception:
Setting Manually off is maintained after fuel changeover also.
Activation of Manually off in operation
To activate Manually OFF, first run the system to the minimum output limit. Then, press
the F button for at least 1 second and press the – button.
Manually OFF is activated by releasing and pressing again the F button and pressing
the – button.
Caution!
Manually OFF must not be used just to put a burner out of operation when
doing mounting work, or when the burner is not ready for operation. The safety
notes contained in chapter Safety notes must be observed!
Manual output via the PC software ACS410
Refer to description of the PC software ACS410 (J7352).
10.5 Output with curve settings

To set the curves via the AZL2 or the PC software ACS410, a special parameterization
output is provided.
Using this output, it is also possible to approach the point of ignition. The output is
delivered automatically and cannot be set manually. It is only mentioned here for the
sake of completeness.
108/283

10.6 External load controller via analog input X64
pin 1 / X64 pin 2
For the preselection of external outputs, an analog 4…20 mA input is provided. Burner
startup can take place only when contact X5-03 pin 1 is closed (load controller On / Off).
Switching thresholds / A disruption of the current input or a current signal <3 mA leads to deactivation of the
minimum positioning analog input’s external predefined output.
step The behavior of the LMV26 / LMV36 in the event of an invalid analog input can be
defined.
To avoid unnecessary positioning steps of the actuators when the input signal varies, it
is possible to set a minimum positioning step for the predefined output.
The minimum positioning step only becomes active in modulating operation. For the
external load controller via the analog input, a value of 1% is preset.
No. Parameter
123.1 Minimum output positioning step: Output external load controller analog
Behavior if analog input is invalid (4...20 mA)
0 = default output low-fire / deactivate trim function (with warning message)
204
1 = safety shutdown + prevention of startup
2 = deactivate default output low-fire / trim function (without warning message)
LMV...
PWM fan
5
4
X64
3
GND 2
1
Bild 364e/0409
Figure 77: External load controller via analog input X64 pin 1 / X64 pin 2
10.6.1 Switching thresholds for modulating operation
Actual value Current Display / output value

Low-fire 3...4 mA 20%
Low-fire 4 mA 20%
High-fire 20 mA 100%
10.6.2 Switching thresholds for multistage operation
For multistage operation, a hysteresis band about the thresholds is introduced. This
hysteresis band replaces the minimum positioning step used in multistage operation.
The band width is approx. 1 mA.
2-stage operation

Stage 1 5 mA (3...12 mA) P1
Hysteresis band 12...13 mA ---
Stage 2 15 mA (13...20 mA) P2
109/283

3-stage operation

Stage 1 5 mA (3...7 mA) P1
Hysteresis band 1 7...8 mA ---
Stage 2 10 mA (8...12 mA) P2
Hysteresis band 2 12...13 mA ---
Stage 3 15 mA (13...20 mA) P3
10.7 Prioritization of load controller sources

To simplify configuration of the LMV26 / LMV36, the load controller source need not be
selected. The LMV26 / LMV36 automatically detects the available load controller
sources and selects them. If several sources are used, they are selected according to
the following priorities:
Parameter 942 Priority Active load controller source

1 highest Chapter Load controller ON-contact X5-03, pin 1
When the input is activated, the other load
controller sources are assessed according to
their priorities. When the input is deactivated, the
burner is off
1 2 Chapter Load output with curve settings
2 3 Chapter Manual output
3 4 Chapter Load controller via the building
automation system X92
4 5 Chapter External load controller via analog input
X64 pin 1 / pin 2
5 6 lowest Chapter External load controller via contacts X5-
03, pin 2 / pin 3
The active load controller source can be read out via parameter 942.
No. Parameter
Active load source
1 = output during curve settings
2 = manual output
942
3 = default output via building automation
4 = default output via analog input
5 = external load controller via contacts
110/283

10.7.1 Emergency operation with several load controller sources
By making use of the prioritization described above, it is also possible to implement

emergency operation.
Should the building automation and control system fail (provided parameter 148 / 149 is
set to undefined (--)), the LMV26 / LMV36 switches automatically over to the external
load controller.
A load controller can be connected via analog input or – if existing – via contacts.
No. Parameter
Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with building
automation
Setting values:
148
0 = burner OFF


Fuel 1: Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with
building automation
Setting values:
149
0 = burner OFF

10.7.2 Manual control
If the external load controller via analog input or contacts is not used, a simple manual
output adjustment via switch can be implemented by cutting the connection to the load
controller for switching from automatic to manual operation. In that case, the LMV26 /
LMV36 switches to the external load controller via contact. A switch for Open/Close or
stage 2/stage 3 can then be connected to the load controller’s terminals.
111/283

11 Electronic fuel-air ratio control
11.1 General
Electronic air-fuel ratio control is used to control the burner’s actuators depending on
burner output. It is possible to connect 2 actuators and, optionally, 1 VSD.
Resolution is 0.1° with the actuators and 0.1% with the VSD. Output can be regulated in
increments of 0.1% in modulating mode and with a maximum of 3 stages in multistage
mode.
To reduce the electric power required for the actuators, they are never operated
simultaneously, but in successive order, or alternately.
11.2 Behavior outside the operating positions

Outside their operating positions, the actuators approach the different positions in
successive order.
The program phase determines the position to be approached.
11.2.1 Traveling speed
The running speed of the actuators is fixed at 5 seconds for a positioning angle of 90°
for SQM33.4, SQM33.5, and SQN1.
The speed is 10 seconds for a positioning angle of 90° for SQM33.6.
The SQM33.7 requires 17 seconds for a positioning angle of 90°.
The ramp speed of the VSD can be adjusted separately for higher and lower speeds.
No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
The setting also applies to the operating position (refer to chapter Running position).
11.2.2 Home position
This position is approached in the Home run (10), Standby (12) and Lockout position
(00) phases.
The position can be set via the following parameters:
Parameter Actuator
501.00 Idle position fuel actuator
502.00 Idle position air actuator
503.00 Idle speed VSD
504.00 Fuel 1: Idle position fuel actuator
505.00 Fuel 1: Idle position air actuator
506.00 Fuel 1: Idle speed VSD
112/283

11 Electronic fuel-air ratio control 17.12.2018
11.2.3 Prepurging
This position is approached in phase Traveling to prepurging (24).
Parameter Actuator
501.01 Prepurge position fuel actuator
502.01 Prepurge position air actuator
503.01 Prepurge speed VSD
504.01 Fuel 1: Prepurge position fuel actuator
505.01 Fuel 1: Prepurge position air actuator
506.01 Fuel 1: Prepurge speed VSD
No. Parameter
Gas: Prepurging
222 0 = inactive
1 = active
Oil: Prepurging
262 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging
322 0 = inactive
1 = active
Fuel 1 oil: Prepurging
362 0 = inactive
1 = active
11.2.4 Ignition
The ignition position is approached in phase Traveling to the ignition position (38).
The position is set via curve parameterization under P0. In modulating operation, this
point is assigned to an output of 10%.
11.2.5 Postpurging
This position is approached in phase Traveling to postpurging (72).
Parameter Actuator
501.02 Postpurge position fuel actuator
502.02 Postpurge position air actuator
503.02 Postpurge speed VSD
504.02 Fuel 1: Postpurge position fuel actuator
505.02 Fuel 1: Postpurge position air actuator
506.02 Fuel 1: Postpurge speed VSD
11.3 Modulating operation

In modulating mode, it is possible to operate 2 actuators and 1 VSD. The burner‘s
output can be regulated between 20% (low-fire) and 100% (high-fire) in increments of
0.1%. Since the actuators are never allowed to operate simultaneously, the output is
increased in small steps of 1%.
With a ramp-up time of 32 seconds in operating position (from 20% to 100%), this
results in a step within 400 ms.
Within such an output step, the air actuator or the VSD is operated in the first 200 ms,
and the fuel actuator in the second 200 ms.
113/283

11.3.1 Definition of curves
The air-fuel ratio curves are defined by 10 curvepoints that are fixed and distributed
across the output range.
The following assignment applies:
Curvepoint Output Meaning

P0 10% Point of ignition, not approached in the operating position
P1 20% Low-fire
P2 30%
P3 40%
P4 50%
P5 60%
P6 70%
P7 80%
P8 90%
P9 100% High-fire
The actuator positions can be set with a resolution of 0.1°.

Between the curvepoints, the positions are interpolated in a linear manner.
100
90
80
70
60
Fuel
50 Air
40 VSD
30
20 Bild 385e/1109
10
0
P2 30 %
P3 40 %
P4 50 %
P5 60 %
P6 70 %
P7 80 %
P8 90 %
P9 100 % High-fire
P0 10 % Ignition point
P1 20 % Low-fire
Figure 78: Definition of curves
No. Parameter
401 Ratio control curve fuel actuator (curve setting only)
402 Ratio control curve air actuator (curve setting only)
403 Ratio control curve VSD (curve setting only)
404 Fuel 1: Ratio control curve fuel actuator (curve setting only)
405 Fuel 1: Ratio control curve air actuator (curve setting only)
406 Fuel 1: Ratio control curve VSD (curve setting only)
114/283

11.3.2 Traveling speed / maximum curve slope
The rise time required to modulate from low-fire to high-fire can be set via parameter
544.
The following maximum curve slopes (positioning angle) can be achieved depending on
the set ramp-up time (parameter 544):
Modulation Modulation Modulation Modulation

32 s 48 s 64 s 80 s
Positioning angle
Positioning angle
Positioning angle
Positioning angle
Type of Positioning
actuator speed
²)
²)
²)
²)
Actuators (3 Nm) 5 s / 90° 31° 46° 62° 77°
Actuator SQM33.6 10 s / 90° 15° 22° 30° 37°
Actuator SQM33.7 17 s / 90° 9° 1) 13° 18° 22°
VSD 5 s / 100% 40 % 60 % 80 % 100 %
10 s / 100% 20 % 30 % 40 % 50 %
20 s / 100% 10 % 15 % 20 % 25 %
30 s / 100% 6,6 % ¹) 10 % 13 % 16 %
40 s / 100% 5 % ¹) 7.5 % ¹) 10 % 12 %
¹) Depending on the setting, the restriction of the maximum positioning angle does not permit the
maximum position of 90° to be reached
²) Maximum difference between 2 curve points
No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
544 Ramp modulating
647 No-load time for speed measurement in modulating operation [25 ms]
The setting also acts outside the operating position (refer to chapter Traveling speed).
115/283

VSD / PWM fan
For the VSD or the PWM fan, it is also possible to change the maximum speed
differential between 2 curvepoints via the no-load time for the speed measurement in
modulating operation. This is 200 ms (value 8) in the default setting and can be reduced
to 100 ms (value 4). Shortening the no-load time can result in problems in connection
with the internal speed control of the LMV26 / LMV36 and is only recommended with the
control deactivated.
The achievable maximum speed difference can be calculated based on the following
formula:
Maximum speed 100% * modulating operating ramp * (16 – no-load time speed measurement)
differential -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(Ramp time * 128)
Between the ignition time (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), a speed differential of up to
40% can be set for the VSD or the PWM fan, independent of the selected ramp. This
means that the period of time from ignition to low-fire can vary between 4…32 seconds
(5 to 40 seconds ramp).

code code
84 Bit 0 VSD: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 1
Bit 1 Fuel actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 2…3
Bit 2 Air actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 4…7
The parameterized curve is steeper than permitted with the selected actuator speed.
11.3.3 Entering the running position
The burner is ignited when ignition position P0 is reached. When entering operating
phase 60, the actuators follow the defined curves until the low-fire position is reached
(20% or parameter 545 / 565).
No. Parameter
Lower output limit
545
undefined = 20 %
Fuel 1: Lower output limit
565
undefined = 20 %
11.3.4 Operating position
As demanded by the load controller, the actuators are driven along the defined 20% and
100% curves. Point of ignition P0 can only be reached via the curve setting.
116/283

11.3.5 Limitation of modulation range
If the modulation range shall be further restricted from 20 to 100% against the defined
curve, 4 parameters are available to define a new low-fire and high-fire position.
No. Parameter
Lower output limit
545
undefined = 20 %
Upper output limit
546
undefined = 100 %
565
undefined = 20 %
Fuel 1: Upper output limit
566
undefined = 100 %
VSD
100 % High-fire
Upper output
Lower output
20 % Low-fire
limit P546
limit P545
Figure 79: Restriction of modulation range
117/283

11.3.6 Setting the minimum and maximum output
For changes regarding setting of the minimum and maximum output after the
curve settings, note the following:
After leaving the curve settings with completely defined curvepoints, proceed in
modulating operation by setting the minimum / maximum output (parameters 546 / 545
or 566 / 565).
In case of the warm setting, the parameterized output remains active until setting of the
minimum / maximum output is completed. Any change to the minimum / maximum
output is included in the parameterized output. Automatic operation becomes active only
after leaving the minimum / maximum output.
Automatic operation is only activated once the minimum/maximum output setting is
exited.
As a result of this procedure, the LMV26 / LMV36 maintains the output set by the user,
thus ensuring trouble-free setting of the minimum / maximum output.
Advantages:
 The actual output always corresponds to the currently parameterized minimum /
maximum output or the system output resulting from the curve setting made last,
which means that the output can be ascertained accurately and without interference
 The load controller sources of low priority (contacts, analog input, building
automation system output, manual output) are inactive
 During the curve and the subsequent minimum/maximum output settings, the
Manual OFF function is deactivated
 Unambiguous and easy-to-understand behavior of the system
 Note
If output limitation is not required, the minimum / maximum output need not be set.
In that case, an undefined minimum / maximum output corresponds to a minimum
output of 20% and a maximum output of 100%.
No. Parameter
Lower output limit
545
undefined = 20%
Upper output limit
546
undefined = 100%
565
undefined = 20%
566
undefined = 100%
118/283

11.4 Multistage operation
This operating mode is only available when firing on oil. There is a choice of 2-stage and
3-stage operation. Hence, the burner’s output can be modulated via 2 or 3 stages.
Modulation is accomplished by adjustment of the air actuator or the VSD and by
switching the fuel valves for adjusting the amount of fuel.
11.4.1 Definition of curves
Fuel-air ratio control is defined via the 2 or 3 static output points. To switch the valves on
and off, switch-on and switch-off points must be defined.
The following assignments apply:
Curve- Meaning Valve

point
P0 Point of ignition (not approached in the operating position) V1
P1 Stage 1 V1
P2on Switch-on point stage 2. When the angle exceeds this point, the V1
fuel valve for the second stage is switched on
P2_d Presetting of point P2 with no approach V1
P2 Stage 2 V2
P2of Switch-off point stage 2. When the angle falls below this point, the V2
fuel valve for the second stage is switched off
P3on Switch-on point stage 3. When the angle exceeds this point, the V2
fuel valve for the third stage is switched on
P3_d Presetting of point P3 with no approach V2
P3 Stage 3 V3
P3of Switch-off point stage 3. When the angle falls below this point, the V3
fuel valve for the third stage is switched off
The actuator positions can be set with a resolution of 0.1°, the speeds with a resolution
of 0.1%.
11.4.2 Traveling speed
The defined ramp speeds are used.

The speed of the VSD can be adjusted separately for speed increase or decrease.
No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
The setting also acts outside the operating position.
The SQM33.7 requires 17 seconds for a positioning angle of 90°.
119/283

11.4.3 Adjustment of output
When the output increases, the LMV26 / LMV36 moves from the curvepoint of stage 1
(P1) to the switch-on point of stage 2 (P2on). If the switch-on point is exceeded, the
valve for the second stage is switched on. Then, the LMV26 / LMV36 moves to the
curvepoint for stage 2 (P2). When the output decreases, the LMV26 / LMV36 moves
from the curvepoint of stage 2 (P2) to the switch-off point of stage 2 (P2of). If this point
is crossed, the valve for the second stage is switched off. Then, the LMV26 / LMV36
moves to the curvepoint for stage 1 (P1).
In 3-stage operation, the output between stage 2 and stage 3 is adjusted analogously to
2-stage operation. As static outputs, only P1, P2 and P3 can be approached.
The switch-on and switch-off points are crossed only when changing between stages.
The traveling speeds are fixed. Depending on the positioning angles to be covered, air
actuator and VSD do not reach the operating or switch-on/switch-off points at the same
time. The valves are switched on/off only after the actuators have reached their correct
positions.
When parameterizing the curves, the switch-on points can also be approached in a
stationary manner. In addition, when setting the curve via P2_d (P3_d), curvepoint P2
(P3) can be readjusted without traveling to it. In that case, the LMV26 / LMV36 is at the
respective switch-on point. This procedure is used to reduce the operating time if there
is shortage of air.
Figure 80: Adjustment of output
11.4.4 Entering the operating position
The burner is ignited at ignition position P0. When entering operating phase 60, the
actuators are driven from ignition position P0 to the operating point of stage 1 (P1) at the
respective traveling speed.
11.4.5 Operating position
In the operating position, the burner’s output can be adjusted between operating points
P1 and P2 or P3 in accordance with the load controller’s presetting, as described in
chapter Adjustment of output. Ignition position P0 is not approached anymore. It can
only be reached via curve adjustment.
120/283

11.4.6 Limitation of modulation range
If the modulation range for stage 1 and stage 2, or stage 3, shall be further restricted, 4
parameters can be used to define a new low-fire and high-fire position.
No. Parameter
Lower output limit
545
undefined = 20 %
Upper output limit
546
undefined = 100 %
565
undefined = 20 %
566
undefined = 100 %
11.5 End of operating position

When there is no more heat request, the LMV26 / LMV36 switches to phase 62. Here,
the burner runs down to low-fire as long as possible before the valves are shut.
The available period of time can be set via parameter 212. If this time is set to the
minimum value, the burner is immediately shut down if there is no more request for
heat. If the time exceeds 32 seconds, the burner always runs to low-fire. Naturally, it is
also possible to set intermediate times.
No. Parameter
212 Maximum time down to low-fire
121/283

11.6 Notes on settings and parameter settings
 When making the settings for the electronic fuel-air ratio control system integrated
in the LMV26 / LMV36, it must be ensured that sufficient amounts of excess air are
available because over a period of time, the flue gas values are impacted by a
number of factors, such as air density, wear of actuators and controlling elements,
etc. For this reason, the flue gas values initially set must be checked at regular
intervals
 To safeguard against accidental or unauthorized transfer of parameters from the
parameter backup of the ACS410 to the LMV26 / LMV36, the OEM (burner or boiler
manufacturer) must enter an individual burner identification for every burner.
Only when this requirement is satisfied does the LMV26 / LMV36 make certain that
the ACS410 does not transfer a parameter set from a plant (with unsuited and
possibly dangerous parameter values) to the LMV26 / LMV36
 With the LMV26 / LMV36, it should be noted that the unit’s characteristics are
determined primarily by the parameter settings and not so much by the type of
LMV26 / LMV36. This means that – among other considerations – the parameter
settings must always be checked prior to commissioning the plant, and that the
LMV26 / LMV36 must never be transferred from one plant to another without
adapting its parameters to the new plant
 When using the ACS410 PC software, the safety notes given in the relevant
Operating Instructions (J7352) must also be observed
 The parameter level is password-protected. The OEM assigns individual passwords
to the parameter levels he can access. The unit is supplied with default passwords
entered by Siemens; they must be changed by the OEM. These passwords are
confidential and may be assigned to authorized personnel only
 The responsibility for setting parameters is assumed by the person who, in
accordance with the access rights, has made changes on the respective setting
level
In particular, the OEM assumes responsibility for the correct parameter settings
in compliance with the standards covering the specific applications (e.g.
EN 676, EN 267, EN 1643, etc.).
122/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54
One or 2 actuators can be connected to the LMV26 / LMV36, depending on the selected
operating mode (refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).
Caution!
When mounting the actuators, it must be made certain that the mechanical link
to the controlling elements is form-fitted!
LMV...
1 UAC_SA
2 GND
FUEL X54
Fuel actuator 3 ACT0_OUT_A
4 ACT0_OUT_B
5 ACT0_IN_A
6 ACT0_IN_B
Bild 419e/0913
Figure 81: Fuel actuator (X54)
When using 2 actuators per fuel for each type of fuel, they must be connected to the
AGM60 switch unit (refer to chapter AGM60). Otherwise, the fuel actuator must be
connected directly to the LMV26 / LMV36
LMV...
1 UAC_SA
2 GND
Air actuator 3 ACT1_OUT_A
AIR X53
4 ACT1_OUT_B
5 ACT1_IN_A
6 ACT1_IN_B
Bild 420e/0913
Figure 82: Air actuator (X53)
12.1 Function principle

The actuators are driven by stepper motors. The resolution reached when making 1
positioning step is 0.1°.
The SQM33.7 requires 17 seconds for a positioning angle of 90°. An optical incremental
transducer is used to monitor the current position. Due to the use of a gear train with
almost no backlash, position control is not required.
12.2 Definition of angles

The angles and angular ranges are specified in the Data Sheets of the relevant
actuators.
SQM33.4: Refer to Data Sheet N7813.

SQN1: Refer to Data Sheet N7803.
Also refer to figure Angle definitions with SQM33.
123/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.3 Referencing
An incremental transducer is used for position feedback. This means that referencing of
the actuators must be performed after power-ON. In addition, at the end of each
shutdown in phase 10, the actuators are referenced to ensure that individual stepping
errors, which could lead to shutdown, do not accumulate. If a position error occurs, the
LMV26 / LMV36 switches to the safety phase (phase 01), enabling the actuators with
detected position errors to be referenced. During the following phase 10, the only
actuators referenced are those that were not referenced before in the safety phase
(phase 01). The position of the reference point can be selected depending on the type of
burner, either the Closed position (<0°) or the Open position (>90°).
When using actuators SQM33.6 or SQM33.7, the actuator type (parameter 613) must
be set (refer to chapter Actuator type / running time).
 Note!
If a SQM33.7 is used, the modulating operating ramp (parameter 544) may need to be
increased (refer to chapter Running speed / maximum curve slope).
Listed below settings for air apply to both fuels:

 In single-fuel operation or in dual-fuel operation, the parameters 601...606 and 611
are assigned to fuel 0
 In dual-fuel operation, the parameters 608...610 and 612 are assigned to fuel 1
No. Parameter
544 Ramp modulating
Selection of reference point
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
601
Setting values:
0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
602
Setting values:
0 = counterclockwise
1 = clockwise (exclusively for SQM3)
Tolerance limit of position monitoring (0.1°)
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
606
Greatest position error where an error is securely detected
 error detection band: (parameter 606 -0.6°) up to parameter 606
Fuel 1: Selection of reference point for fuel actuator
608 0 = closed (<0°)
1 = open (>90°)
Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation
609 0 = counterclockwise
Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring for fuel actuator (0.1°)
610
 Error detection band: (parameter 606 -0.6°) up to parameter 606
124/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
No. Parameter
Type of reference
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
611 Setting values:

0 = standard
1 = range stop in the usable range
2 = internal range stop (SQN1)
3 = both
Fuel 1: Type of reference for fuel actuator
0 = standard
612 1 = range stop in the usable range
3 = both
613 Type of actuator
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
Setting values:
0 = 5 s / 90° (1 Nm, 1,2 Nm, 3 Nm)
1 = 10 s / 90° (6 Nm)
2 = 17 s / 90° (10 Nm)
614 Fuel 1: Type of actuator of the fuel
0 = 5 s / 90° (1 Nm, 1,2 Nm, 3 Nm)
1 = 10 s / 90° (6 Nm)
2 = 17 s / 90° (10 Nm)
 Application note!
Single-sided load torque is recommended due to the type of gear train for the
SQM33.6 / SQM33.7 actuators. In the event of load on both sides, a backlash of 0.3°
must also be considered in addition to plant design or setting
125/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.3.1 Reference run
Different reference runs are made to unambiguously determine the actuators’

permissible working range. This means that, in the event of a power failure during
referencing, the actuator is prevented from travelling to a range outside the optical
feedback system or from running against a mechanical stop. Parameters 611 and 612
must be set, depending on the mechanical design and the type of actuator used.
In the case of reference travel type 1, actuator SQM33 first travels to the starting point.
 Note!
Always select reference travel type 2 for SQN13 and SQN14.
Parameterization for No. Parameter Setting for actuator

reference travel type 0 and SQM33 SQN13 SQN14
type 2 611 Type of referencing
Index 0 = Fuel 0 2 2
Index 1 = Air 0 2 2
612 Fuel 1: Type of referencing for fuel 0 2 2
actuator
Parameterization for No. Parameter Setting for actuator type ...

reference travel type 1 SQM33
611 Type of referencing
Index 0 = Fuel 1
Index 1 = Air 1
612 Fuel 1: Type of referencing for fuel 1
actuator
To prevent the actuator from running against a mechanical stop during referencing, the
home position may have to be adjusted (depending on the direction of rotation and a
reference point of about 3° or 87°). In the case of stops within the usable range, the
prepurge or postpurge position must be checked also.
Refer to the figure below for details of the reference travel.
126/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
Example of actuator with counterclockwise rotation:
When referencing in the CLOSE position, the actuator first travels a certain distance into
the working range (toward the OPEN position). Then, it travels to a position representing
maximum -7.7°, thereby crossing the reference mark for the first time. Then, the
actuator moves in the other direction again and detects the inner ramp of the reference
mark. This is the reference point used by all positions. If the reference point is
parameterized in the OPEN position, referencing takes place in a mirror-symmetrical
manner. In that case, the actuator first travels into the working range (toward the OPEN
position). Then, it crosses the reference mark and travels to a position representing
maximum 110.6°, then back to the inner ramp of the reference mark.
) Reference range "Close"

n”
pe
g “O
cin
e 7.7°
ng
en
ra
r
fe
n
re
io
r
Close (0° + 0.6°)

fo
lat
ge
du
ran
Mo
Range stop "Close"

i ng
e)
ng
ork
ra
(w
e
bl 5.6°
.6°
sa
(u
110
°
90
+
18.5°
20.6°
Range stop "Open"
Reference range "Open"

Figure 83: Angle definitions with SQM33

code code
85 0 Referencing error of fuel actuator
1 Referencing error of air actuator
Bit 7 Referencing error due to parameter change
Valency ≥128
127/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.4 Direction of rotation
With the SQM3 actuator, the direction of rotation can be selected on an individual basis.
No. Parameter
602.00 Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 0 = fuel
Setting values:
602.01 Actuator's direction of rotation
Index 1 = air
Setting values:
609.00 Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation
0°
0°
Counterclockwise Clockwise
Figure 84: Direction of rotation (example SQM3)
The direction of rotation of the SQN1 actuators depends on the version:

 SQN13: Direction of rotation Left
 SQN14: Direction of rotation Right
 Note
The actuators are always supplied with the flat of the drive shaft facing upward.
128/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.5 Monitoring the actuator positions
To monitor the actuator’s current positions, an optical incremental transducer with a
resolution of 0.7° is used. The correct position of the drive shaft is ensured by
comparing the motor steps made with the position obtained from the incremental
transducer. Due to the different resolutions of motor steps and incremental transducer
plus the selected tolerance band, the following error detection band is obtained. The
position where – in the error detection band – shutdown takes place depends on the
position currently required.
For the default setting made in the factory, the error detection band is as follows:
Smallest position error where an error can be detected 0.8°

Greatest position error where an error is securely detected (default setting 1.7°
parameter 606 or 610)
The presetting of 1.7° (default setting, parameter 606 or 610) is suited for use with
actuators type SQN1 and SQM3.
 Note
When using SQN1 actuators equipped with plastic gear trains, we recommend to
change the preset values as follows:
Product no. Value

SQN13.14 1,7°
SQN14.14 1,7°
SQN13.17 2,2°
SQN14.17 2,2°
When referencing under output conditions, the resilience of the actuator’s gear train
must also be taken into consideration:
Product no. Resilience at max.

rated driving torque
SQM33.41 0.2°
SQM33.51 0.2°
SQM33.6 0.2°
SQM33.7 0.2°
SQN13.14 0.3°
SQN13.17 0.8°
SQN14.14 0.3°
SQN14.17 0.8°
The error detection time is <1 second.
Caution!
This means that – for the design and setting of the burner – a position error
resulting from the sum of …
- greatest position error from which an error is detected in all positions,
- resilience at the max. rated torque, and
- mechanical influence from the link between actuator and regulating unit (e.g.
coupling)
must not lead to a critical state in terms of safety.
129/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
/
No. Parameter
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
606
610

code code
86 0 Fuel actuator: Position error
87 0 Air actuator: Position error
130/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.6 Changing the error detection band for
monitoring the actuator positions
The error detection band can be changed via parameter 606 or 610.
A change is to be made only when using SQN13.17 or SQN14.17 actuators which, due
to their mechanical design, require greater tolerances.
For these types of actuators, set parameter 606 or 610 to 2.2°.
No. Parameter
Index 0 = fuel
606 Index 1 = air
610
12.7 Forced travel

There are errors in the actuators’ feedback unit which can only be detected in
connection with position changes. To be able to also detect such errors when
maintaining the same position for longer periods of time, travel is enforced when, for
more than 50 minutes, an actuator moves no more than 2.8°. With forced travel, both
actuators are driven 2.8° in the direction of smaller positioning angles and back again to
the initial angular position. If a damper is less than 2.8° open, the actuator is driven in
the direction of positive angles in order not to run against mechanical stops, if present.
Forced travel lasts a total of 1 second.
12.8 Detection of line interruptions

The connecting line ensuring position feedback from the actuator to the LMV26 / LMV36
is monitored for interruptions, which means that position feedback cannot fail without
being noticed.

code code
86 Bit 0 Line interruption fuel actuator
Valency 1
87 Bit 0 Line interruption air actuator
Valency 1
131/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
12.9 Protection against mixup
Mixup of actuators can be detected through appropriate mounting (using different
reference marks for the air and fuel actuator: OPEN / CLOSE / 0° / 90°). With at least
one of the actuators, the reference mark not used must be blocked by a mechanical
stop. Now, if the actuator connections with the LMV26 / LMV36 have been
interchanged, one of the actuators cannot reach the reference mark, which is detected
by the LMV26 / LMV36. Protection against mixup is a question of burner application and
must be ensured by the OEM.
Caution!
To be able to detect mixup of actuators, the burner manufacturers must ensure
that the 2 actuators use opposing reference points. One of the actuators uses
the OPEN reference, the other the CLOSE reference. Approach of the reference
point not used must be blocked with at least one of the actuators!
12.9.1 Proposal for implementation
 Parameterize referencing of the air damper in the CLOSE position

 Parameterize referencing of the fuel damper in the OPEN position. Unnecessary
travel can be avoided by defining a home position of 90° for the fuel damper
 Mechanical stop at the air damper in the range between 90° and 108.5°, and / or
mechanical stop at the fuel damper in the range between 0° and -5.6°
Referencing process
 From any position in the working range (0…90°), but typically from the home
position, the air damper travels to the -7.7° position and back again to the home
position
 From any position in the working range (0…90°), but typically from the home
position, the fuel damper travels to the 110.6° position and back again to the home
position
Action in the event of mixup
 The fuel damper (fitted in place of the air damper) travels to the -7.7° position and
back again to the home position
 The air damper (fitted in place of the gas damper) tries to travel to the 110.6°
position, but is prevented from doing so by the mechanical stop. This is
unsuccessful travel and identified as mixup
The above procedure to prevent mixup of actuators by using different reference

positions is only suited for 2 actuators. In the case of dual-fuel systems with 3 actuators,
it can be employed to prevent mixup of air actuator and fuel actuators OR to prevent
mixup of fuel actuators. With the LMV26 / LMV36, the above procedure ensures
protection against mixup of air actuator and fuel actuators (different reference positions
and mechanical stops).
 Note
It is recommended to color-code the actuators’ assignment to the AGM60, thus
preventing mixup of actuators by observing the respective color marks on the AGM60
and the actuators’ connectors.
132/283

12 Actuators X53 / X54 17.12.2018
13 Fan control
13.1 Function principle
Optionally, the LMV26 / LMV36 can be operated with a VSD or PWM fan.
The activation takes place via a DC 0…10 V or alternatively via a PWM interface.
For control of the fan’s speed, a safety-related speed feedback signal is required.
With pneumatic ratio control, the speed feedback signal is not evaluated as standard.
It is, however, possible to define additional limit thresholds for supervising the fan speed
during prepurging, ignition and operation.
To facilitate the use of fans with different speed ranges, the fan’s speed is standardized
between 0…100% (up to 14000 rpm is supported as the maximum fan speed).
If fan control is not connected, a load output and, alternatively, a fuel meter output are
available (refer to chapters Load output X74 pin 3 and Fuel meter input X75 pin 1/X75
pin 2).
LMV...
5 5
4
VSD X74
4 Actual speed
X64
3 3
2 2
1 1 L Sensor
Sensor disk
VSD
M
Bild 332en/1016 or
PWM
Hall signal
Figure 85: Function principle of fan control
13.2 Activation of VSD / PWM fan

The VSD can be activated in any of the operating modes (parameters 201 and 301).
No. Parameter
Activation of VSD / PWM fan
0 = deactivated
542
1 = activated
 Note
For configuration of the analog output when the VSD is activated, refer to chapter
Power output X74 pin 3!
133/283

13 Fan control 17.12.2018
13.3 VSD control X74 pin 3
The VSD is controlled via a voltage interface (refer to chapter Load output X74 pin 3)!
Depending on the type of VSD used, a release contact is required. This contact can be
controlled via the fan motor contactor. To enable the VSD to bring the fan motor’s speed
to the correct no-load speed, the motor contactor’s drop out delay time must be about
25 seconds.
Example:
Siemens Micromaster 440
+24 V 9
5
K1
+ 3
Setpoint 0...10 V
4
28
K1
Figure 86: Connection of VSD to the LMV26 / LMV36
It is possible to set the VSD control to 0 via the analog output when the safety loop is
open (including burner flange switch).
This may be necessary if the no-load speed is not 0.
No. Parameter
652 VSD behavior when safety loop / burner flange is open
0 = no VSD control when safety loop / burner flange is open
1 = VSD control independent of safety loop / burner flange
13.4 PWM fan control X64 pin 3

The PWM fan is controlled via PWM voltage interface X64 pin 3.
Caution!
A PWM fan can only be used in the factory settings in conjunction with
pneumatic ratio control!
A PWM fan motor can only be used in the electronic ratio control system with a self-
regulated PWM fan (see chapter Speed control).
134/283

13.5 Safe separation of mains voltage and
protective extra low-voltage
Caution!
All inputs and outputs of PWM fan control are designed for use with protective
extra low-voltage. For this reason, strict separation from the mains voltage side
must be ensured!
This necessitates an external power supply by the VSD or an external power pack (X74
pin 1, X74 pin 2).
LMV...
5
VSD X74
4
3 Power output
2 GND
1 24 V external
Bild 433en/0916
Figure 87: Power output
 Note
Power must also be supplied via X74 pin 1/2 in the case a PWM fan is used.
135/283

13.6 Ramp time
The ramp time for fan control can be set separately for acceleration and deceleration
(also refer to chapter Traveling speed/maximum curve slope).
No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
544 Ramp modulating
If shutdown occurs because the speed has not been reached, the VSD/fan motor might
not be able to follow quickly enough the set ramp.
In the case of a ramp time >20 seconds, the modulating operating ramp (parameter
544) must be increased (refer to chapter Running speed / maximum curve slope).
Remedy:
Shorten further the ramp of the VSD/fan motor or increase the ramp in the LMV26 /
LMV36 (parameters 522/523) (also refer to chapter Traveling speed/maximum curve
slope).
For VSD operation

Caution!
The ramps parameterized for the VSD should be at least 20% shorter than the
ramps in the LMV26 / LMV36.
Example:
5 s ramp LMV26 / LMV36 4 s ramp VSD

136/283

13.7 Acquisition of speed
13.7.1 Acquisition of speed with proximity switch
The actual speed is acquired by an inductive proximity switch which scans a metal
sensor disk. The sensor disk must be attached directly to the motor’s drive shaft. Speed
acquisition is safety-related. To facilitate the detection of the direction of rotation and to
be able to make the plausibility check with only 1 sensor, a sensor disk with angular
steps of 60°, 120° and 180° is used. It generates 3 pulse intervals of different length.
Speed acquisition is designed for the connection of different types of sensors.
Caution!
With electronic fuel-air ratio control, speed acquisition is safety-related!
We recommend using the AGG5.310 accessory set.

The absolute speed can be read out via the AZL2.
No. Parameter
935 Absolute speed
The current speed in standardized form can be read out via the AZL2.
No. Parameter
Speed input X74 pin 4 Motor speed: 300...14000 rpm

100% speed: 650...14000 rpm
Sensor: Inductive sensor to DIN 19234 (Namur) or
Open Collector (pnp) at UCEsat <4 V, UCEmin >DC 15 V
Power supply: DC 10 V, max. 15 mA
Switching current: >10 mA
Cable length: Max. 3 m (sensor cable must be laid separately!)
Sensor disk
Sensor disk and speed sensor can be ordered as accessory set AGG5.310.
ø5
0
ø4
,3
(2x
)
Number of tappets: 3
Angular steps: 60°, 120°, 180°
0,1
2°
Bild 333/0309
Accuracy:
0,1
ø 94
Figure 88: Sensor disk
137/283

Speed sensor
Figure 89: Speed sensor
Selection of fan motor
Motor supplier:
Selection of a motor with threaded hole M8 x 15 at the end of the fan motor’s drive
shaft.
Standard motor and machining (drilling hole and cutting thread M8 x 15).
13.7.2 Acquisition of speed with Hall generator
If the speed is acquired via a Hall generator, the requirements for safety-related
applications are the same as those for the speed feedback signal via sensor disk.
Required is an asymmetric signal with the 3 pulses of 60°, 120° and 180° for detection
of the direction of rotation.
With the PWM fan, the symmetrical hall signal of the fan can also be used for the
acquisition of motor speed. The symmetry and the number of pulses must be adapted
for this. The maximum speed is 14000 rpm.
No. Parameter
Setting speed signal
643 0 = asymmetrical
1 = symmetrical
644 Number of pulses per rotation (1 to 6)
138/283

13.7.3 Forced travel fan
When a symmetrical speed signal is used, like with the actuators, a forced travel is also
carried out for the fan to detect an error in the speed feedback signal when a speed is
maintained for a long period of time. The activation of the forced movement is started if
the fan has not moved by more than the neutral zone of the speed supervision
(parameter 662) for longer than 50 minutes.
During the forced movement, the fan travels 1.8% towards the lower speed and back to
the original speed. If the start speed is lower than 11.8%, the fan speed is increased to
prevent a drop below the minimum speed specification. The entire forced travel lasts
approx. 1-2 seconds.
All relevant actuators are always moved during the forced travel, which means that,
when the forced travel is actuated due to insufficient change in speed, the active
actuators are also subjected to a forced travel or vice versa. This procedure reduces the
frequency of the forced travel of the LMV26 / LMV36, as all actuators are processed
synchronously.
No. Parameter
662 Neutral zone of the speed supervision (0.5...3.5%)
13.8 Speed control

The LMV26 / LMV36 controls the fan motor’s speed to the setpoint. To ensure that the
speed can still be increased when the maximum speed is reached, the speed is
standardized when the motor is controlled at 95%. Hence, with a speed setpoint of
100%, a speed increase of 5% is still possible.
The control range of the LMV26 / LMV36 is +15% / -10%. If this range is not sufficient,
error 80 or 83 can occur.
Error Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36

code
80 1 Control range limitation at the bottom
2 Control range limitation at the top
 Note
Internal control with a VSD or PWM fan motor must not be activated. Otherwise,
speed variations can occur, resulting from simultaneous control actions from both the
LMV26 / LMV36 and internal control.
The internal control of the LMV26 / LMV36 can be deactivated via parameters. On the
one hand, this takes place automatically if a pneumatic operating mode is selected (see
chapter Selection of operating mode). This is also necessary when a self-regulated
PWM fan is used in an electronic ratio control system.
The speed control setting also has an impact on the determination of the standardized
speed (see chapter Speed standardization).
No. Parameter
LMV26 / LMV36 internal speed control
661 0 = deactivated (self-regulated PWM fan)
1 = activated (VSD)
139/283

13.9 Speed supervision
The fan’s current speed is acquired by the LMV26 / LMV36 and assessed from a safety
point of view. If the fan does not operate at the speed setpoint, speed control makes a
corrective action, trying to reach the setpoint. If it is not reached within a certain period
of time, safety shutdown is initiated. To ensure a high level of availability and safety, a
number of monitoring bands with different response times are defined.
To adapt to the application, the tolerance bands and response or shutdown times can
be changed via the OEM level in defined limits:
Tolerance band Adjustable value range Adjustment of the

shutdown time
0…Neutral zone Neutral zone (0.5...3.5%) 
Neutral zone…Close range Close range (2...5.5%) <8...16 s
> close range <3...7 s
The combination of tolerance band and shutdown time must be chosen by the OEM so
that no hazard potential can occur within the application.
No. Parameter
662 Neutral zone of the speed supervision
663 Close range of the speed supervision
664 Speed supervision: Maximum time between the neutral zone and close range
665 Speed supervision: Maximum time outside close range
It is possible to switch off speed supervision at standstill (no-load speed 0%) in standby
mode. This may be necessary if the fan rotates too much in standby mode due to a
chimney draft or if an extended ramp time is active with a PWM fan during the transition
from the postpurge speed to standstill.
No. Parameter
653 VSD standstill supervision in standby mode
0 = deactivate
1 = active
The following tolerance bands and shutdown times apply in the default setting:
Speed deviation in % points Shutdown time

0…0.5% Speed reached  no shutdown
0.6...2% <8 s
2.1...10% <3 s
>10% <1 s
140/283

13.9.1 Extended speed supervision
Additional supervision limits can be activated via the OEM level for different operating
states. A check is only carried out to determine whether the value was exceeded or
fallen short of here. A shutdown takes place after the Maximum time outside close range
(parameter 665, default setting 3 s) has elapsed. An interruption in the speed feedback
signal results in a safety shutdown within 1 second.
These limits can also be activated in pneumatic operation if a speed signal is present.
No. Parameter
665 Speed supervision: Maximum time outside close range
667 Minimum prepurge speed
668 Maximum ignition speed
669.0 Minimum / maximum speed limitation in operation
Index 0 = minimum speed
669.1 Minimum / maximum speed limitation in operation
Index 1 = maximum speed
Speed
Bild 441en/1216
Valid
prepurging
range
Maximum
ignition
speed
(parameter 668) Valid
Minimum operating
prepurge range
speed
(parameter
667) Valid
ignition
range
Start Prepurge Ignition Operation

phase phase phase phase
Figure 90: Extended speed supervision
 Note!
 The standardization in pneumatic operation is only possible if at least one
extended speed supervision has been activated (parameter 667, 668 or 669.0 /
669.1). The supervisory functions are deactivated in the presetting
 When supervising the maximum ignition speed, the preignition time (parameter
226 / 326 or 266 / 366) must correspond to at least the time setting Maximum
time outside close range (parameter 665)
141/283

code code
83 Bit 0 Lower control range limitation of control
Valency 1
Bit 1 Upper control range limitation of control
Valency 2...3
Bit 2 Interruption via disturbance pulses
Valency 4...7
Bit 3 Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed
Valency 8
Bit 4 Interruption of speed signal
Valency 16
Bit 5 Quick shutdown due to excessive speed deviation
Valency 32
Bit 6
Minimum speed fall below
Valency 64
Bit 7
Maximum speed exceeded
Valency 128
192 Incorrect setting: Minimum speed  maximum speed
Incorrect setting: Neutral zone  close range
255 Error forced travel PWM fan
13.10 Setting the parameters of the VSD

If a control signal of 95% (9.5 V) is not sufficient for the burner to deliver its rated
capacity, you can proceed as follows:
 Set the maximum frequency to 105.3% of the motor’s rated speed
In the case of a motor frequency of 50 Hz, this means:

Set the maximum frequency of the VSD to 50 Hz x 1.053 = 52.6 Hz (on the VSD).
 Then, standardize the speed (refer to chapter Standardization of speed)
There is no risk of motor overload since only 95% of the maximum control signal is
delivered during standardization and – later in operation – the effective speed is
controlled and monitored.
Frequencies of between 50 Hz and 52.6 Hz are delivered only if these are needed for
reaching the required speed due to increased output.
 Set the ramp times of the VSD according to chapter Setting the ramp times
142/283

13.11 Standardization of speed
Since the different types of fans operate at different speeds and signal handling should
be as straightforward as possible, all speeds in the LMV26 / LMV36 are standardized
between 0 and 100%. For this reason, the VSD module uses a parameter which
contains the Standard speed (100% speed). All absolute speeds refer to this speed.
If changes to the VSD or the fan are made, speed standardization should be repeated.
Caution!
 If automatic speed standardization is activated, or if the standardized
speed is changed, the settings of air-fuel ratio control must be checked!
Any change of the standardized speed alters the assignment between the
percentage values parameterized on the curves and the speed
 When the parameter set (refer to ACS410 (J7352)) is restored, the
standardized speed is restored also.
If a data set is transferred to a new LMV26 / LMV36 via the restore process
(e.g. during a device replacement), the standardization of the speed must
be carried out again
 In pneumatic ratio control, at least one additional supervision threshold
(parameter 667, 668 or 669) must be activated to carry out a speed
standardization
No. Parameter
667 Minimum prepurge speed
668 Maximum ignition speed
Minimum / maximum speed limitation in operation
669 Index 0 = minimum speed
Automatic speed To facilitate determination of the standardized speed, the LMV26 / LMV36 features
standardization automatic speed standardization. The speed must be standardized while in standby
mode. Speed standardization is integrated in the setting process for electronic fuel-air
ratio control, but can also be started later from the parameter setting level. When using
a release contact for the VSD (external relay at fan output X3-05 pin 1), the fan output is
controlled during speed standardization.
1. Start speed standardization

To start automatic speed standardization, set parameter 641 to 1.
No. Parameter
641 Control of VSD’s speed standardization
Error diagnostics of negative values (refer to error 82)
0 = no speed standardization
1 = speed standardization active
2. Drive the air damper to the prepurge position

Speed standardization begins when the air damper travels to the prepurge position.
When this position is reached, the damper should be fully open so that the fan operates
at full capacity.
143/283

3. Control the VSD
The VSD is activated with 95% of the maximum voltage during active speed control.
A margin of 5% allows the speed to be readjusted should environmental conditions
change. This means that full speed (100%) is reached with 95% VSD control (refer to
chapter Setting the parameters of the VSD).
The specification for determining the standardized speed varies depending on the speed
control setting and the selected operating mode. This means that a slightly reduced fan
speed may be available.
Internal Electronic ratio control (e.g. Pneumatic ratio control (e.g. operating
control operating mode 1: G mod) mode 7: G mod pneu)
parameter
661
1 95% regulated operation 100% pneumatic
0 98% unregulated operation 98% pneumatic (deactivated control
has higher priority than pneumatic ratio
control)
No. Parameter
LMV26 / LMV36 internal speed control

661 0 = deactivated (self-regulated PWM fan)
1 = activated (VSD)
4. Wait until the speed is higher and has stabilized

Before the 100% speed can be measured, the fan must have reached stationary
conditions. This means that the fan must operate under stable conditions above 650
rpm. When this state is reached, a certain waiting time is observed, allowing the speed
to eventually stabilize.
5. Measure the speed and store it

When the speed has stabilized, measure and store it as the Standardized speed (100%
speed).
144/283

6. Close the standardization
When standardization is successfully completed, reset parameter 641 to 0.
If standardization was not successful, parameter 641 assumes a negative value.
No. Parameter
Control of VSD’s speed standardization
Error diagnostics of negative values (refer to error 82)
641
The value provides information on the cause of fault:
Value Error Remedy

-1 Timeout of standardization (VSD ramp down Timeout at the end of standardization during ramp down
time too long) of the VSD
 Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than
those of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameter: 523)
-2 Storage of standardized speed not successful Error during storage of the standardized speed
 lock the LMV26 / LMV36, then reset it and repeat the
standardization
-3 Line interruption speed sensor LMV26 / LMV36 receives no pulses from the speed
sensor.
1. Motor does not run.
2. Speed sensor is not connected.
3. Speed sensor is not actuated by the sensor disk
(check distance).
-4 Speed variation / VSD ramp up time too long / Motor has not reached a stable speed after ramp up.
speed below minimum limit for standardization 1. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than
those of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameters 522, 523).
2. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration
of the voltage input at the VSD must accord with the
configuration of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameter 645).
3. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of
the LMV26 / LMV36. Check settings of the VSD
(input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different
speeds)
4. Speed of VSD lies below the minimum for
standardization (650 rpm).
-5 Wrong direction of rotation Motor’s direction of rotation is wrong.
1. Motor turns indeed in the wrong direction
 change parameterization of the direction of rotation
or interchange 2 live conductors.
2. Sensor disk is fitted the wrong way
 turn the sensor disk.
-6 Unplausible sensor signals The required pulse pattern (60°, 120°, 180°) has not
been correctly identified.
1. Speed sensor does not detect all tappets of the
sensor disk
 check distance
2. As the motor turns, other metal parts are detected
also, in addition to the tappets
 improve mounting.
3. Electromagnetic interference on the sensor lines
 check cable routing, improve EMC
-7 Invalid standardized speed The standardized speed measured does not lie in the
permissible range
 motor turns too slowly or too fast
-15 Speed deviation µC1 + µC2 The speeds between µC1 and µC2 deviated too much.
145/283

Value Error Remedy
This can be caused by wrong standardized speeds (e.g.
after restoring a data set to a new LMV26 / LMV36)
→ repeat standardization and check the fuel-air ratio
-20 Wrong phase of phase manager Standardization was made in a wrong phase. Permitted
are only phases 12
 load controller OFF, start standardization again
-21 Safety loop / burner flange open Safety loop or burner flange is open
 repeat standardization with safety loop closed
-22 Air actuator not referenced Air actuator has not been referenced or has lost its
referencing.
1. Check if the reference position can be approached.
2. Check if actuators have been mixed up.
3. If error only occurs after the start of standardization,
the actuator might be overloaded and cannot reach its
destination.
-23 VSD deactivated Standardization was started with VSD deactivated
 activate the VSD and repeat standardization
-24 No valid operating mode Standardization was started without valid operation
mode
 activate valid operation mode and repeat
standardization
Standardization was started with pneumatic air-fuel ratio
control
-25 Pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
→ standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control is
not possible
-128 Running command with no preceding VSD is controlled but not standardized
standardization  make standardization
-255 No standardized speed available Motor turns but is not standardized
 make standardization
The result of speed standardization (100% speed) can be read out via parameter. The
speeds acquired by the 2 microcontrollers can differ by about 1.5%, the reason being
slightly different resonator frequencies.
No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
642.0 Standardized speed
Index 0 = speed 1
642.1 Standardized speed
Index 1= speed 2 (internal monitoring)
642.2 Fuel 1: Standardized speed
Index 2 = speed 3
642.3 Fuel 1: Standardized speed
645 Configuration of analog output
0 = DC 0...10 V
1 = DC 2...10 V
2 = DC 0/2...10 V
 Note!
Different standardized speeds for fuel 0 and 1 in dual fuel operation are only
necessary if the internal speed control of the LMV26 / LMV36 is active and the LMV26
/ LMV36 is operated in mixed operation electronic fuel / air ratio control / pneumatic
fuel / air ratio control.
146/283

13.12 Control of fan motor with pneumatic fuel-air
ratio control
For the fan motor control for burners with pneumatic ratio control, only the control path is
used with the factory setting
There is no need to connect a speed feedback signal and to have speed control (for
operating modes, refer to chapter Selection of operating mode).
If speed monitoring is required in the pneumatic ratio control, additional supervision

thresholds can be activated (see chapter Acquisition of speed or Extended speed
supervision).
13.13 EMC of LMV26 / LMV36 and VSD

The function and EMC tests with the LMV26 / LMV36 have been successfully conducted
in connection with the following makes and types of VSDs:
Siemens: SED2-0.37 / 22 X
Danfoss: VT2807
During operation, VSDs generate electromagnetic interference on the mains network.

For this reason, the supplier’s specifications must be strictly observed to ensure that
makeup of the system is in compliance with EMC regulations:
Siemens: Operating Instructions  installation conforming to EMC

Danfoss: Technical Brochure  radio suppression filter
Data Sheet on Danfoss EMC filter for long motor cables
Caution!
When using other types of VSD, compliance with EMC regulations and trouble-
free operation are not ensured!
147/283

13.14 Special conditions for PWM fan in
electronic ratio control system
When using a PWM fan in the electronic ratio control system, different conditions must
be observed or complied with.
This is connected, among other things, with the different properties of the PWM fan
compared with VSDs.
 Fan characteristic
 Load dependency of the speed
 Reduced braking performance
 Acquisition of speed
13.14.1 Characteristics PWM fan
The LMV26 / LMV36 works with a standardized speed signal, with linear interpolation
between standstill and the standardized speed (nominal speed). The requirement for
this assumption is a linear fan characteristic, which is achieved solely by self-regulated
PWM fans.
To prevent conflicts between self-regulated fans and the internal speed control of the
LMV26 / LMV36, it must be deactivated (parameter 661; see chapter Speed control).
The tolerance limits may also have to be adapted to the speed supervision (see chapter
Speed supervision).
In contrast to a VSD, the fan speed of a PWM fan is heavily dependent on the load (air
throughput) of the fan. This characteristic is partially balanced out by a self-regulated
PWM fan, but still leads to a big time difference in the comparison between acceleration
and deceleration. The extreme case here is a closed air damper, e.g. during the
transition from postpurging to standby.
Another disadvantage of the current PWM fan is the partially significantly reduced
braking performance (without the option of additional braking resistances, e.g. with a
VSD). This means that the different ramp time values for run-up / run-down (parameter
522 / 523) have to be set. This behavior must also be taken into account with the
modulating operating ramp (parameter 544).
The LMV26 / LMV36 also has the option of activating the actuators with a time delay
(parameter 529). In this case, the braking performance is improved by carrying out the
speed reduction with the air damper open. The air throughput increases the braking
performance of the fan, which reduces the speed faster. This process can be set during
the transition from prepurging to ignition (phase 35), when moving in postpurging (phase
71) and from postpurging to standby (phase 79). The air actuator is only moved to the
relevant damper position once the ignition speed or standby speed is achieved.
If value 2 is set, an additional tolerance increase of 50% on the neutral zone (parameter
662) and the close range (parameter 663) of the speed supervision is possible outside
of operation.
148/283

No. Parameter
522 Ramp up
523 Ramp down
529 Separate movement of the fan (ignition speed / postpurge speed)
0 = deactivated
1 = activated
2 = activated (50% tolerance increase outside operation)
544 Ramp modulating
661 LMV26 / LMV36 internal speed control
0 = deactivated (self-regulated PWM fan)
1 = activated (VSD)
662 Neutral zone of the speed supervision
663 Close range of the speed supervision
13.14.2 Acquisition of speed PWM fan
Due to design-related restrictions, it is usually not possible to mount a sensor disk for
generating an independent, asymmetrical (direction of rotation sensitive) speed signal
on a PWM fan. Instead, the symmetrical speed signal of the PWM fan based on the Hall
effect is used. No direction of rotation recording is possible due to the symmetrical
structure.
The PWM function in the electronic ratio control system is only permitted in conjunction
with a fail-safe feedback signal of the fan with error analysis (in accordance with DIN EN
60730-1 class C).
For a plausibility check with regard to a fault-free Hall feedback, an additional speed-
dependent air pressure switch can therefore be used for a comparison between the
speed signal and the resulting air pressure (see chapter Additional speed-dependent air
pressure switch).
With a correspondingly high ON threshold of the air pressure switch, this also includes
verification of the correct direction of rotation and the required air quantity for prepurging
and high-fire.
The system manufacturer / system operator must determine and guarantee that
adequate fail-safe properties are achieved in accordance with standards.
The LMV36s fulfill the requirement of the UL standard, EN 12067-2 and ISO 23552-1
(gas/air ratio control) if the following basic principles are met:
 Directly connected PWM fan
 Directly fail-safe feedback signal of the fan according to EN 60730-1 class C
If the basic principles outlined above are not met, the local safety regulations for the
application must be checked by the system manufacturer / system operator.
The safety of the entire LMV26 / LMV36 must be guaranteed by the system
manufacturer / system operator.
Attention!
To avoid personal injury or damage to property, the following note must be
observed.
If the feedback signal of the fan does not correspond to EN 60730 - 1 class C, there is a
risk of unclean combustion, which can lead to the following:
 CO emissions and poisoning
 Explosion
 Damage to property
149/283

13.15 Trim function
The trim function enables the specified speed of the ratio control curve to be changed in
adjustable limits via 4…20 mA input. The residual oxygen content of the flue gas or the
supply air temperature can be used for determining the current setting.
Depending on the setting, the trimming can be activated from ignition or only in
operation, between low-fire and high-fire, after an adjustable wait time has elapsed. No
trimming of the fan speed takes place during the curve setting.
The restriction of the trimming range must be selected so that no unsafe state can occur
in the application under any environmental conditions. The LMV26 / LMV36 also has
various options for ensuring that the trim function or the components involved in the trim
function run correctly (see chapter Optional internal checks / chapter Optional external
checks).
150/283

13.15.1 Settings and mode of operation
The maximum trimming range of -15…+25% cannot be changed and is intrinsically

linked to the 4...20 mA specification of the analogue input (40% trimming range based
on 16 mA  1% trim per 0.4 mA).
 20 mA = +25% speed correction

 10 mA = 0% or no speed correction
 4 mA = -15% speed correction
20 mA = +25% (theoretical maximum trim value)
+20% Upper trim limit (parameter 548 / 568)
10 mA (no trim)
-4% Lower trim limit (parameter 547 / 567)

7544z09en/0916
4 mA = -15% (theoretical minimum trim value)

Figure 91: Setting range trim limits
In order to adapt to the application and the environmental conditions present at the time
the settings are made, the trim range can be restricted independently for each fuel (the
setting 0% deactivates the relevant direction of influence). It is also possible to set a wait
time for trim function activation, e.g. to obtain more reliable residual oxygen content
values for O2 trimming. The wait time during operation can be practically deactivated by
selecting an extremely low value if the trim function is used as temperature
compensation.
To influence altered environmental conditions in the ignition and to improve the ignition
behavior, the ignition speed can also be adapted depending on the ambient temperature
where necessary. The temperature-dependent offset on the ignition speed specified in
the prepurging is retained until the delay time has elapsed in operation.
Impact of the trimming with different outputs
It is unlikely that an identical trim correction (e.g. +10% speed) will have the same
impacts for low-fire and high-fire. This is why load-dependent trim damping is used. The
damping factor is based on low-fire and can be set in the value range 0% (no damping)
to 100% (no trimming with low-fire). The damping is interpolated linearly to the low-fire
based on the current (limited) trim correction value. The output-dependent impact of the
trim correction can already be taken into account by the external control in the current
setting.
 Note!
The impact of the trimming is changed very slowly with 0.1% per 0.2 seconds. This
means that it takes 50 seconds to deactivate the trim function starting from +25%.
151/283

No. Parameter
Behavior if analog input is invalid (4…20 mA)
0 = deactivate default output low-fire / trim function (with warning message)
204
1 = safety shutdown + startup prevention
2 = deactivate default output low-fire / trim function (without warning message)
Activation trim function
0 = inactive
1 = active
530
2 = active (including test function for analog input)
3 = active (including ignition speed)
4 = active (including ignition speed and analog input test)
547 Lower range limit trim function
548 Upper range limit trim function
549 Damping factor for trim function (based on low-fire)
550 Delay time / wait time for trim function after entering phase 60
551 Wait time until response with active trim limitation
Behavior if maximum trim limitation time is exceeded
0 = warning message only (trim impact remains active)
552
1 = warning and deactivation of the trim function
2 = shutdown
569 Damping factor for trim function (based on low-fire)
570 Delay time / wait time for trim function after entering phase 60
571 Wait time until response with active trim limitation
Behavior if maximum trim limitation time is exceeded
0 = warning message only (trim impact remains active)
572
1 = warning and deactivation of the trim function
2 = shutdown
152/283

13.15.2 Optional internal checks
The LMV26 / LMV36 has various settings and monitoring options to ensure that the trim
function runs correctly and error-free. The external control unit and control section are
used here in places. The OEM is responsible for implementing the necessary measures
for fulfilling the local requirements.
Plausibility check for the curve setting
When the trim function is activated, the LMV26 / LMV36 carries out permanent
supervision of the speed curve. In order to cover the desired range with the trim function,
a sufficient reserve must be available in the curve setting (e.g. upper trim limit 10% 
90% maximum curve setting). Otherwise, it wouldn't be possible to carry out the desired
trim correction, as the speed would be limited by the minimum or maximum limitation.
Error- Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36

code
155 # Trim function: Invalid curve setting VSD / PWM fan
0..9 Minimum value VSD curve fall below
20..29 Maximum value VSD curve exceeded
40..49 Fuel 1: Minimum value VSD curve fall below
60..69 Fuel 1: Maximum value VSD curve exceeded
Plausibility check for range limitation
A plausibility check can be activated to show if the LMV26 / LMV36 remains on a range
limit of the trim function for a defined time (time setting = 0 deactivates the check /
warning / shutdown).
This can be used to identify an incorrect setting in the trim function.
In the default setting, no shutdown takes place and only a warning is generated.
This means that the LMV26 / LMV36 remains in operation.
Deactivation of the trim function and a shutdown can also be triggered in response to
the system remaining on a range limit for too long.
If error code C:156 is only output as a warning message, it can only be seen for the
period the error is active, as warning messages are not saved permanently in the error
history.
The PLC must therefore read out the current error memory of the LMV26 / LMV36
cyclically via Modbus (e.g. every 2...30 s) and save a corresponding warning message
permanently.

code
156 # Trim function: Maximum time for range limit exceeded
0 Trim function at lower limit
1 Trim function at upper limit
10 Fuel 1: Trim function at lower limit
11 Fuel 1: Trim function at upper limit
153/283

Analogue input test during burner startup
A test sequence with 2 current thresholds can be used to identify errors in the analog
input during burner startup.
To this end, the PLC must deliver a current of 10 mA (0%) during standby and a current
of 4 mA (-15%) during traveling to prepurging or the first 2 seconds in prepurging.
The LMV26 / LMV36 uses these test values to check for fault-free function of the analog
value recording and can therefore detect component faults and drift.
The expected values are also used for indirect supervision of the Modbus
communication and the external control (PLC).
In the event of an error, the burner startup is prevented (test in standby) or canceled
(test in prepurging).
The test can only be carried out during burner startup, a cyclical test during operation is
not possible.
For this reason, the forced intermittent operation may not be switched off when the
analog input test is activated.
This ensures that the analog input test is carried out at least once every 24 hours.
The supervision is carried out by LMV26 / LMV36.
The PLC or the external control can read out the LMV26 / LMV36 phase information
required for the test via Modbus.

code
157 # Trim function: Analog input test
0 Analog value standby
1 Analog value prepurging
154/283

13.15.3 External tests (optional)
In addition to the LMV26 / LMV36 internal tests, various states may also be monitored
by an external PLC or control. Selected process parameters, e.g. the current phase, can
be read out via Modbus for this purpose. In this case, the LMV26 / LMV36 is shut down
via a self-locking NC contact of the PLC in the safety loop (X3-04 pin 1 and pin 2) or in
series with the load controller ON signal (X5-03 pin 1 and pin 4).
Impact of the trimming range restriction with PLC
The defined assignment between the current setting and trim impact (4...20 mA is
shown as -15…+25 %) must also be taken into account by the PLC. Particularly when
reducing the possible trim range (parameter 547 / 548 or 567 / 568), the PLC must also
take the reduced limit values into account. The relevant parameters can be read out via
Modbus for this purpose.
To guarantee that, despite tolerances between the PLC analog output and LMV26 /
LMV36 analog input, the maximum limits for the trimming can be achieved, the PLC
must deliver a current value that is approx. 0.5% (i.e. approx. 0.2 mA) off the set limit
values (over for the upper limit, under for the lower limit).
No. Parameter
External supervision: Target/actual comparison of the trim specification
The single-channel version of the LMV26 / LMV36 analog value recording is not fail-safe.
The control unit responsible for the specification of the 4...20 mA signal for O2 trimming
can either trigger a safety shutdown or shutdown via an NC contact if an excessively
large deviation is detected between the trim setpoint and the determined trim
specification of the LMV26 / LMV36. To this end, the trim specification of the LMV26 /
LMV36 can be read out via Modbus (raw value, target value with limitation and damping,
as well as the current active trim influence).
4...20 mA trim signal
SPS LMV3...
7544z10en/0916
Modbus
Figure 92: Trim supervision with PLC
With this supervision, the PLC can create a closed loop over the analog input of the
LMV26 / LMV36 and the trim specification, including the analog output of the PLC, via
Modbus.
155/283

External supervision of the residual oxygen content in the flue gas
Particularly for a trim specification based on an O2-measurement, there is the option of

additional supervision of the flue gas values with regard to the minimum / maximum O2
value. For this, the PLC can read out the LMV26 / LMV36 phase and LMV26 / LMV36
output via Modbus and supervise output-dependent minimum / maximum O2 values.
This ensures that the application is always operated in the correct working range.
In the event of an error, a safety shutdown via the safety loop or a shutdown via the load
controller ON signal can be triggered as a response as required. Another option in the
event of an error is to deactivate the trim function via a 10 mA current setting in the PLC.
Trim range test via PLC
Once the curve setting or commissioning is complete, a trim range test must be carried
out to check the influence on the application.
The test is initiated by the PLC, which provides both the output specification (via
Modbus) and the trim specification (via 4...20 mA).
Test sequence:
1. Starting point:
The PLC delivers a stationary output specification
( no modulation during the test sequence)
2. Lower trim limit test:
The PLC delivers the minimum current setting (4 mA)
Verification of the flue gas values if minimum trim influence is active
3. Upper trim limit test:
The PLC delivers the maximum current setting (20 mA)
Verification of the flue gas values if maximum trim influence is active
Steps 1...3 must be carried out at least for low-fire and high-fire to guarantee a correct
trim setting.
156/283

13.16 Description of connection terminals
13.16.1 VSD
LMV...
5 Power supply for speed sensor
VSD X74
4 Speed input
3 VSD control
2 GND
1 24V EXT
Bild 335e/0409
Figure 93: VSD connection X74
13.16.2 PWM fan

LMV...
5
VSD X74
4
3
2 GND
1 24V EXT
Bild 336/0309
Figure 94: PWM fan X74
LMV...
5 Power supply for sensor

4 Speed feedback / Hall signal
X64
3 PWM speed output

2 GND
1 Controller input 4...20 mA
Bild 337en/1016
Figure 95: PWM fan X64
157/283

14 Load output X74 pin 3
The load output is only available as an alternative to VSD control. If the VSD is
deactivated, the output for the VSD delivers the current burner output. The analog
output is a voltage output and – using parameter 645 – can be switched between DC
0…10 V, DC 2…10 V and DC 0/2…10 V.
Parameter 645 Voltage range Remarks

0 DC 0…10 V No detection of line interruption
1 DC 2…10 V Detection of line interruption
possible
2 DC 0/2…10 V No detection of line interruption.
Recommended setting in
connection with Micromaster VSD
 Note
When changing the analog output configuration from DC 0…10 V to DC 2…10 V or
DC 0/2…10 V, the voltage values with modulating, 2-stage and 3-stage operation
change (refer to chapter Modulating operation, chapter 2-stage operation and chapter
3-stage operation).
Conversion: New value = (initial value * 0.8) + 2
Example: Initially 2 V  (2 * 0.8) + 2 = 3.6 V

Initially 5 V  (5 * 0.8) + 2 = 6 V
No. Parameter
Configuration of analog output
0 = DC 0...10 V
645
1 = DC 2...10 V
2 = DC 0/2...10 V
14.1 Safe separation of mains voltage and extra

low-voltage
Caution!
The load output is designed for SELV or PELV (refer to chapter Electrical
connection of the LMV26 / LMV36 and AGM60).
For this reason, strict separation from the mains voltage side must be ensured!
This necessitates power supply by an external power pack (X74 pin 1, X74 pin 2).
LMV...
5
VSD X74
4
3 Power output
2 GND
1 24 V external
Bild 433en/0916
Figure 96: Power output
158/283

14 Load output X74 pin 3 17.12.2018
14.2 Modulating operation
Actual value Voltage Curvepoint Display / output
value
Off DC 0 V --- Off
Ignition load DC 1 V P0 10%
Low-fire DC 2 V P1 20%
High-fire DC 10 V P9 100%
The values between low-fire and high-fire are interpolated in a linear manner.
14.3 2-stage operation

value
Off DC 0 V --- Off
Stage 1 DC 5 V P1 P1
14.4 3-stage operation

value
Off DC 0 V --- Off
159/283

14 Load output X74 pin 3 17.12.2018
15 Fuel meter input X75 pin 1 / X75 pin 2
A fuel meter can be connected to acquire the amount of fuel burnt.
The fuel meter function is only available as an alternative to VSD control. If the VSD is
deactivated, a fuel meter can be connected to terminals X75 pin 1 and X75 pin 2.
The pulses per volume unit can be set separately for Fuel 0 and Fuel 1. In terms of
hardware, the fuel meter input exists only once however, that is, the change between 2
pulse counters must be made externally. Changeover can be accomplished either via
the fuel selector or an additional contactor at the safety valve output of the AGM60
LMV...
2 Fuel meter input
X75
1 Sensor supply fuel meter
Bild 338e/0409
Figure 97: Fuel meter input X75
15.1 Configuration of fuel meter

15.1.1 Types of fuel meters
The LMV26 / LMV36 is designed for use with fuel meters equipped with a Reed contact.
Pulse frequency at maximum fuel throughput must be below 300 Hz.
15.1.2 Configuration of pulses per volume unit
Depending on the type of fuel meter used, the number of pulses supplied per Cubic
meters (m³) or Liters (l) fuel must be parameterized. A maximum of 400 pulses per
volume unit can be preset. The correct amount of fuel is acquired only when this
parameter is set.
When the parameter is 0, the fuel meter stops.
No. Parameter
128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency [pulses / volumetric flow unit]
129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency [pulse / unit of volume]
15.1.3 Reading and resetting the meter readings
No. Parameter
167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal]
177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal)
The cumulated fuel volume can be read out per parameter. The meter reading can also
be reset on the parameter level.
160/283

15 Fuel meter input X75 pin 1 / X75 pin 2 17.12.2018
15.2 Fuel throughput
With the fuel meter connected, the LMV26 / LMV36 calculates continuously the current
fuel throughput. The time required for calculating the fuel throughput varies and lies
between 1 and 10 seconds. If the meter delivers no pulses for more than 10 seconds,
the display shows 0 fuel throughput. This means that when fuel throughput is at its
minimum, the sensor should have a pulse frequency of at least 0.1 Hz. The display is
smoothed to improve the settling process. With fuel throughput at its maximum, the
maximum frequency is 300 Hz.
15.2.1 Configuration
Calculation of fuel throughput is configured based on the pulse valency of the connected
fuel meter.
No. Parameter
128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)
129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency (pulses/volume unit)
When the pulse valency is set to 0.00, the display shows 0 throughput.
15.2.2 Reading out the fuel throughput
The current fuel throughput can be read out via the following parameter on the service
menu:
No. Parameter
960 Fuel throughput in volume unit /h (m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h)
Display of fuel throughput is possible up to 6553 volume units/h.
 Note
Display of fuel throughput up to a value of 99.9 on the service menu is made with one
decimal place, from 100 with no decimal place.
161/283

15 Fuel meter input X75 pin 1 / X75 pin 2 17.12.2018
16 Connection and internal diagram
End switch burner flange X3-03.1

Fuel 1 (oil)
Power signal for Fuel 0 (gas)
X3-03.2
end switch burner flange
X3-05.1 AGM60...
X3-05.2
SV or
X3-05.3 magnetic clutch (Fuel 1)
X6-02.3
SV
Extra valve SV / magnetic clutch X6-03.3 X32-01.5
X24-06.3
SV (Fuel 0)
BV3 (Fuel 1)
X7-02.3
V3
Fuel valve V3 / pilot valve PV X7-02.3 X32-01.4
PV (Fuel 0)
X24-05.3
Internal fuel selection 0 X9-04.2
P
X5-02.3
Gas or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin) X5-01.2
Pmin Pmax or
POC (Fuel1) P
Power signal for pressure switch X5-01.3 Oilmax
X5-02.2
Gas or oil pressure switch-max (Pmax) P
X5-02.2 X32-01.1 Gasmax
or POC X22-02.2
Safety loop Pmax or
X3-04.1 POC Pmax or
(pressure switch-max (Pmax) optional) Water POC (Fuel0)
shortage
X22-02.3
Power signal for safety loop X3-04.2
V2 (Fuel1)
X8-03.1
V2
Fuel valve V2 X7-01.3 X32-01.3
V2 (Fuel0)
X24-04.3
V1 (Fuel1)
X8-02.1
V1
V1 (Fuel0)
X24-04.4
Reset
Fuel selection
X31-02.1 L
Internal logic X31-01.1
Internal fuel selection 1 X8-04.1 X31-02.2
X31-01.4
External load controller CLOSE / stage 3 X5-03.2 X31-01.3
External load controller OPEN / stage 2 X5-03.3 PE X31-01.2
External load controller (ON / OFF) X5-03.1 X32-02.1
Air pressure switch LP

External load controller X32-02.2
Flame detector QRA... (ON / OFF)
Flame detector QRB... / QRC...
Flame detector ION
X54-a
X54.1-a UAC_SA
X54.2-a GND
Fuel 1 ACT0_OUT_A
X54.3-a
X54.1 X54.4-a ACT0_OUT_B
X54.3 X54.5-a ACT0_IN_A
X54.4 AGV60.50 X54.6-a ACT0_IN_B

Fuel X54
X54.5
X54.1-b UAC_SA
X54.6
X54.2-b GND
X54.2
SQN1... / SQM3... Fuel 0 X54.3-b ACT0_OUT_A
X53.1 UAC_SA
X54.4-b ACT0_OUT_B
X53.2 GND
X54.5-b ACT0_IN_A
X53.3 ACT1_OUT_A
X54.6-b ACT0_IN_B
Air
X53.4 ACT1_OUT_B X54-b
X53.5 ACT1_IN_A Bild 339e/1213
X53.6 ACT1_IN_B
PWM fan
Figure 98: Inputs and outputs
162/283

16 Connection and internal diagram 17.12.2018
Shielding:
For shielding the cables on the VSD, refer to:
 Siemens SED2 VSD Commissioning Manual (G5192), chapters 4 and 7, or
 Danfoss Operation Manual VLT 6000 (MG60A703), chapter Installation
Switching between 2 ratio control curves
LMV...
External load controller (ON/OFF) 3
X9-04
Interal fuel selection 0 2
L1
Reset
X8-04
Interal fuel selection 1 1
Bild 459en/0917
Figure 99: Switching between 2 ration control curves
163/283

16.1 Application example: Gas / biogas
burners
16.1.1 Connection and internal diagram for gas / biogas burners
End switch burner flange X3-03.1
Fuel 1 (biogas)
Power signal for Fuel 0 (gas)
X3-03.2
end switch burner flange
X3-05.1 AGM60...
X3-05.2
X3-05.3
X6-02.3
SV
Extra valve SV / magnetic clutch X6-03.3 X32-01.5
X24-06.3
P
Pmin biogas
X7-02.3
V3 P
Fuel valve V3 / pilot valve PV X7-02.3 X32-01.4 Pmin gas
X24-05.3
Internal fuel selection 0 X9-04.2
X5-02.3
Gas or oil pressure switch-min (Pmin) X5-01.2
P
Power signal for pressure switch X5-01.3 PLT biogas
X5-02.2
P
Valve proving (PLT) X5-02.2 X32-01.1 PLT gas
Pmax P 1) P Pmax
biogas gas X22-02.2
Safety loop X3-04.1
(pressure switch-max (Pmax) optional) Water
shortage
X22-02.3
Power signal for safety loop X3-04.2
V2 (Fuel1)
X8-03.1
V2
V2 (Fuel0)
X24-04.3
V1 (Fuel1)
X8-02.1
V1
V1 (Fuel0)
X24-04.4
Reset
Fuel selection
X31-02.1 L
Internal logic X31-01.1
Internal fuel selection 1 X8-04.1 X31-02.2
X31-01.4
External load controller CLOSE / stage 3 X5-03.2 X31-01.3
External load controller OPEN / stage 2 X5-03.3 PE X31-01.2
External load controller (ON / OFF) X5-03.1 X32-02.1
Air pressure switch LP

External load controller X32-02.2
Flame detector QRA... (ON / OFF)
Flame detector QRB... / QRC...
Flame detector ION
X54-a
X54.1-a UAC_SA
X54.2-a GND
Fuel 1 ACT0_OUT_A
X54.3-a
X54.1 X54.4-a ACT0_OUT_B
X54.3 X54.5-a ACT0_IN_A
X54.4 AGV60.50 X54.6-a ACT0_IN_B

Fuel X54
X54.5
X54.1-b UAC_SA
X54.6
X54.2-b GND
X54.2
SQN1... / SQM3... Fuel 0 X54.3-b ACT0_OUT_A
X53.1 UAC_SA
X54.4-b ACT0_OUT_B
X53.2 GND
X54.5-b ACT0_IN_A
X53.3 ACT1_OUT_A
X54.6-b ACT0_IN_B
Air
X53.4 ACT1_OUT_B X54-b
X53.5 ACT1_IN_A
X53.6 ACT1_IN_B
PWM fan
Figure 100: Gas / biogas burners

1) Switch back of the pressure switch-max only after mechanical lockout
164/283

Gas pressure switch-max and biogas pressure switch-max in safety loop.
Change over gas pressure switch-min / biogas pressure switch-min via terminal X32-01
pin 1 from AGM60, power supply L via e.g. X05-02 pin 3.
16.1.2 Parameter setting
Parameter Description Setting Meaning

236 Gas: Input pressure 1 Pressure switch-min
switch-min (before fuel valve V1)
336 Fuel 1 gas: Input 1 Pressure switch-min
pressure switch-min (before fuel valve V1)
237 Gas: Pressure switch- 3 Pressure switch – valve
max / POC input proving
337 Fuel 1 Gas: Pressure 3 Pressure switch – valve
switch-max / POC input proving
17 Special feature: Burner identification

The OEM must assign an individual burner identification to every burner. This ensures
that during backup/restore, incompatible parameter sets cannot be copied between
different burners (also refer to the documentation on the PC software under
Backup/Restore and in this documentation in chapter Backup / Restore).
No. Parameter
113 Burner identification
165/283

17 Special feature: Burner identification 17.12.2018
18 Connection to superposed systems
18.1 General information and building automation
functions
Communication with building automation system is made possible via a data link using
the COM X92 port and a special interface with galvanic separation and physical bus
level adaptation. This port can be used for connection of a LMV26 / LMV36 with
Modbus, depending on the configuration made.
LMV...
OCI412.10
COM Modbus
X92 RS485
Figure 101: Connection via COM X92 to superposed systems
 Note
Breakdown of bus communication.
If the LMV26 / LMV36 detects a breakdown of bus communication, the building

automation system must rewrite the value upon restoration of communication for the
Modbus operating mode and predefined target output
 Note
Fuel changeover on the LMV26 / LMV36.
After a change of fuel, the building automation system must rewrite the predefined target
output. A change of fuel can be detected by cyclic sampling of the type of fuel currently
burnt.
General setting values for connection of the LMV26 / LMV36 to the building automation
system (for factory settings, refer to the parameter list):
Bus communication may only be interrupted for the time set.

If communication is disturbed for a longer period of time, the LMV26 / LMV36 delivers a
fault status message and the values set in the LMV26 / LMV36 by building automation
system are reset.
166/283

18 Connection to superposed systems 17.12.2018
No. Parameter
Operating mode building automation system
0 = off
141
1 = Modbus
2 = reserved
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown
Setting value:
0 = deactivated
1…7200 s
148 Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with building
automation
Setting values:

0 = burner OFF


149 Fuel 1: Predefined output in the event of communication breakdown with
building automation
Setting values:

0 = burner OFF

The factory settings of the parameters are shown on the parameter list.
 Note
For a detailed description of parameters 148 and 149, refer to chapter Default output
via building automation.
167/283

18.2 Modbus
With this type of bus protocol, the LMV26 / LMV36 operates as a slave on the Modbus
and the transmission mode used is RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
For more detailed information, refer to the Modbus User Documentation (A7541).
No. Parameter
Device address for Modbus of LMV26 / LMV36
145
Setting value:
1…247
Baud rate for Modbus
146 0 = 9600
1 = 19200
Setting of parity for Modbus communication
0 = none
147
1 = odd
2 = even
The factory settings of the parameters are shown on the parameter list.
 Note
If bus communication breaks down, the mode, Modbus operating mode and
predefined target output must be rewritten.
168/283

19 PC software ACS410
The ACS410 PC software serves primarily as an operating module for the LMV26 /
LMV36, providing the following basic functions:
 Visualization of system state via the following data:

- Parameters
- Process data
 Configuration and parameterization of the LMV26 / LMV36 (individual parameters)
 Backup and recovery of parameter sets
 Note
For notes on operation and commissioning, refer to chapter Operation.
Bild 346/0409
Figure 102: Communication with display / BC interface (RJ11 jack) (X56)
LMV...
Vx
TXD0
RXD0
GND
BCI
X56
CO
Bild 340/0309
Figure 103: Display input / BC interface (RJ11 jack) X56
If communication between the LMV26 / LMV36 and the ACS410 (70 seconds) has
broken down, the password level is reset to Info / Service.
Caution!
Interruption of communication between the LMV26 / LMV36 and the ACS410
(30 seconds) during the time the curves are set leads to lockout!
Error- Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36

code code
167 9 Manual locking by the PC software ACS410
Communication breakdown
169/283

19 PC software ACS410 17.12.2018
20 Error history
The LMV26 / LMV36 provides an error history in which the last 25 errors are stored. The
first entry represents the current error state and can also be error-free, refer to Error
code list.

code code
200 OFF # LMV26 / LMV36 error-free
20.1 Error classes

The errors are subdivided into error classes, depending on the severity of the switch-off
response. The current error shows all classes. Only the errors of the most important
classes are included in the history.
Error class Priority Meaning History

0 Highest Lockout ●
1 Safety shutdown with software reset ●
2 Undervoltage
3 Safety shutdown: Safety phase ●
4 Safety shutdown: Start prevention
5 Safety shutdown: Shutdown ●
6 Lowest Message without shutdown response
170/283

20 Error history 17.12.2018
20.2 Makeup of error history
Parameter Index Description
701 Current error state, can also be error-free
.01 Error code (200 = error-free)  refer to Error code list
.02 Diagnostic code  refer to Error code list
.03 Error class  error classes
.04 Phase: Phase in which error occurred  sequence diagrams
.05 Startup counter: (parameter 166) at which the error occurred
.06 Output: Burner output at which the error occurred
.07 Fuel in which error occurred
702 .01..07 Latest error in the history
●
●
●
725 .01..07 Oldest error in the history
No. Parameter
166 Total number of startups
Deleting the error history Both the service menu and the parameter setting menu show the error history.
The display on the service menu can be deleted in a way that the only errors shown are
those that occurred after the deletion.
The error history on the parameter setting menu cannot be deleted.
For the deletion, parameter 130 must be set to 1 and then to 2 within 6 seconds.
When the parameter returns to 0, the deletion process is completed.
No. Parameter
Delete display of error history
To delete the display: Set parameter to 1, then to 2
130
Return value 0: Job successfully completed
Return value -1: Timeout of 1_2 sequence
171/283

20 Error history 17.12.2018
21 Lifecycle function
If the startup counter exceeds a defined threshold, a display error code is set and
displayed. The error can be acknowledged.
The display code is always set in standby (when there is no heat request).
Hence, the moment the threshold is exceeded, the user is notified that the end of the
lifecycle of the LMV26 / LMV36 will soon be reached.

code code
116 0 Designed life time exceeded (250´000 startups)
 Note
The LMV26 / LMV36 should be replaced when this message appears.
22 Safety notes on use of the AZL2

Caution!
To prevent the risk of fire and explosions, damage to heating plant or damage
resulting from improper use of the products, ensure that the following safety
notes are observed:
The burner management system covered by the present Basic Documentation may
only be used as specified and only in connection with the appropriate burner and
heating plant.
The burner management system with its AZL2 and the associated heating control
system may only be installed and commissioned by authorized technical personnel.
The AZL2 may only be used in dry spaces. Do not use AZL2 outdoors and protect it
against excessive temperatures and frost, and liquids, such as water, oil, fuel oil, etc.
Follow exactly the procedures and setting notes given in this Basic Documentation.
Appropriately identified settings must only be made by authorized technical personnel.
If the AZL2 is dusty or dirty, clean it with a dry cloth.
Do not carry out any maintenance or repair work on the AZL2. Such work may only be
performed by authorized technical personnel.
If you have any questions in connection with the AZL2, please contact your heating
engineer or refer to one of the addresses given in this Basic Documentation.
172/283

21 Lifecycle function 17.12.2018
23 Operating via AZL2
23.1 Description of unit/display and buttons
Function and operation of unit versions AZL21 and AZL23 are identical.
Bild 1/0809
P
/reset
V h min s %
VSD ESC
F A
Figure 104: Description of unit/display and buttons
Button Function
Button F
- For adjusting the fuel actuator
(keep depressed and adjust the value by pressing or )
Button A
- For adjusting the air actuator
(keep A depressed and adjust the value by pressing or )
Buttons A and F: Parameter function
- For changing to parameter setting mode P
(press simultaneously and A plus or )
Info and Enter button
- For navigating in info or service mode
* Selection (symbol flashing) (press button for <1 s)
* For changing to a lower menu level (press button for 1…3 s)
* For changing to a higher menu level (press button for 3…8 s)
* For changing the operating mode (press button for >8 s)
- Enter in parameter setting mode
- Reset in the event of fault
- One menu level down
- button
- For decreasing the value
- For navigating during curve adjustments in info or service mode
+ button
- For increasing the value
- For navigating during curve adjustments in info or service mode
+ and - button: Escape function
(press and simultaneously)
- No adoption of value
- One menu level up
173/283

23 Operating via AZL2 17.12.2018
23.2 Meaning of symbols on the display
Fault status message
Flame present
Bild 2e/0807
Valve controlled
Ignition controlled
Fan motor controlled
Oil preheater on
Heat request from controllers
Parameter setting mode

Info mode
Service mode
Actuator closing
Actuator opening
Unit of current display
Figure 105: Meaning of display
23.3 Brightness of display

Only available with backlit LCD:
The function of the backlit display is dependent on the type of LMV26 / LMV36.
The brightness of the display can be adjusted from 0…100% using parameter 126.
No. Parameter
126 Display brightness
23.4 Special functions

23.4.1 Manual lockout
Press /reset simultaneously with any other button.
The LMV26 / LMV36 switches instantly to the

lockout position, irrespective of the operating
position.
/reset
plus other button The display shows the fault status message.
(Refer to chapter Error code list!)
Display: Loc: 167
The reset must be carried out as follows:
When /reset is pressed for 1 second, rESEt

appears on the display.
/reset
1s When the button is released, the LMV26 / LMV36
is reset.
174/283

23.4.2 Manual control (manual request for output)
Burner is in operation.
P
The display shows oP: on the left, the
Bild 4/0707
percentage of the current output on the right.
V h min s %
Example: oP: 20.0
P Press for 1 s.
Bild 5/0707
1s The display shows LoAd:, the current output
V h min s % flashes.
P Press or to adjust the required

manual output.
Bild 6/0707
and
V h min s % Example: oP: 23.0
or
P Release .
Bild 7/0707
The current manual output flashes, indicating
V h min s % that manual control is activated.
Press for 3 seconds to return to

automatic mode.
P
The output no longer flashes.
Bild 8/0707
V h min s %
The display shows oP: on the left, the
percentage value on the right.
Example: oP: 23.0
23.5 Timeout for menu operation

The time for automatically leaving the parameter setting level can be adjusted between
10 and 120 minutes, using the following parameter:
No. Parameter
127 Timeout for menu operation
If, during that period of time, there is no operation via the AZL2, the parameter setting
level is quit and the password level reset to Info / Service.
Caution!
In addition, this timeout or interruption of communication between LMV26 /
LMV36 and the AZL2 during the time the curves are set, leads to lockout!
Error- Diagnostic Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36

code code
167 8 Manual locking by the AZL2
Timeout / communication breakdown
175/283

23.6 Backup / restore
Using the AZL2, the settings made on the LMV26 / LMV36 can be stored (backup) and
then transferred back to the LMV26 / LMV36 at a later point in time.
Creating a backup data set
No. Parameter
050.0 Index 0: Creation of backup
The following parameters can be used to read information about the backup data set:
No. Parameter
055 Burner identification of the AZL2 backup data set
056 ASN extraction of the AZL2 backup data set
057 Software version used when creating the AZL2 backup data set
Restoring a backup data set
To transfer a backup data set back to the basic unit, the parameter must be set to 1.
No. Parameter
050.1 Index 1: Execute restore
176/283

23.6.1 Backup
Parameter 000: flashes.
Display: Parameter 000: flashes, Int does not.
/reset
Press to select parameter 050
Display: Parameter 050. flashes, index 00: and value 0 do

not.
/reset
Press to select parameter bAC_UP

7548z358/1009
/reset
Display: Parameter bAC_UP
/reset
Press /reset to select the backup process.
Display: Value 0
Press to shift the value in change mode 1 position to

the left.
Display: Value 1 flashes
Note
 To detect potential display errors, the value is displayed 1
place shifted to the left.
Press /reset to activate the backup process.
/reset
Display: 1 appears
177/283

After about 5 seconds (depending on the duration of the
program), 0 appears on the display, indicating the end
Approx.
of the backup process.
5s
Display: 0
 Note
If an error occurs during the backup process, a negative value is displayed. For error
diagnostics, the cause of the error can be determined from the diagnostic code of error
message 137 (see Error code list).
Caution!
We recommend to make a backup whenever a parameter is changed!
178/283

23.6.2 Restore
Display: Parameter 000: flashes, Int does not.
/reset
Press to select parameter 050
Display: Parameter 050. flashes, index 00: and value 0 do

not.
/reset
Press to go to parameter bAC_UP.

7548z358/1009
/reset
Display: Parameter bAC_UP
Press to go to the rEStorE function.

7548z 359/1009
Display: Parameter rEStorE
/reset
Press /reset to select the restore process.
Display: Value 0
Press to shift the value in change mode 1 position to

the left.
Display: Value 1 flashes.
Note
 To detect potential display errors, the value is displayed 1
place shifted to the left.
179/283

Press /reset to activate the restore process.
/reset
Display: 1 appears
After about 8 seconds (depending on the duration of the

program), 0 appears on the display, indicating the end of
Ca.
the backup process.
8s
Display: 0
 Note
 Before restoring the backup data on the LMV26 / LMV36, the latter compares the burner
identification and product no. (ASN) with the burner identification and product no. (ASN) of
the backup data set. If the data accord, they are restored. If not, the restore process is
aborted. In case of abortion, or if an error occurs during the restore process, the display
shows a negative value. For error diagnostics, the cause of the error can be determined from
the diagnostic code of error message 137 (see Error code list). When the restore process is
successfully completed, value 0 appears on the display. The LMV26 / LMV36 is supplied with
undefined burner identification. In that case, the restore process from the AZL2 is possible
without having to enter the burner identification in the LMV26 / LMV36
 Information Err C: 136 D: 1 (restore started) is displayed for a short moment
Caution!
 On completion of the restore process, the sequence of functions and the parameter
settings must be checked
 When using a VSD, it might be necessary to repeat standardization
180/283

24 Operation of LMV26 / LMV36 via the AZL2
24.1 Normal display
Normal display is the standard display in normal operation, representing the highest
menu level. From the normal display, you can change to the info, service or parameter
level.
24.1.1 Display in standby mode
P
LMV26 / LMV36 is in standby mode.
Bild 9/0707
V h min s %
Note!
 OFF flashes when the Manual OFF function, the manual
output, or load controller OFF is activated.
24.1.2 Display during startup / shutdown

24.1.2.1. Display of program phases
The LMV26 / LMV36 is in phase 22. The load controller

P
calls for heat. The bar below the symbol appears. The
Bild 10/0707
individual program phases and controlled components are

V h min s % displayed in accordance with the program sequence.
24.1.2.2. Display of program phase with remaining running time until end of the phase is reached
The LMV26 / LMV36 is in phase 30 and shows the

P
remaining running time in that phase.
Bild 11/0808
Example: 12 s, phase 30
V h min s %
181/283

24 Operation of LMV26 / LMV36 via the AZL2 17.12.2018
24.1.2.3. List of phase displays
Phase Function
Ph00 Lockout phase
Ph02 Safety phase
Ph10 Home run
Ph12 Standby (stationary)
Ph22 Fan ramp up time (fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)
Ph24 Traveling to the prepurge position
Ph30 Prepurge time
Ph35 Run the fan to ignition speed
Ph36 Traveling to the ignition position
Ph38 Preignition time
Ph39 Valve proving filling time
(test pressure-switch-min when mounted between fuel valve V1 and fuel valve V2)
Ph40 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)
Ph42 1st safety time (ignition transformer OFF),
Ph44 Interval 1
Ph50 2nd safety time
Ph52 Interval 2
Ph60 Operation 1 (stationary)
Ph62 Maximum time low-fire (operation 2, preparing for shutdown, traveling to low-fire)
Ph70 Afterburn time
Ph71 Run the fan to postpurge speed
Ph72 Traveling to the postpurge position
Ph74 Postpurge time (no extraneous light test)
Ph78 Postpurge time (abortion when load controller ON)
Ph79 Run the fan to standby speed
Ph80 Valve proving - test space evacuating
Ph81 Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure
Ph82 Valve proving - test space filling
Ph83 Valve proving - test time gas pressure
Ph90 Gas shortage waiting time
182/283

24.1.3 Display of operating position
P
Display oP stands for Operating position reached.
Bild 12/0707
Modulating mode: Current output in %
V h min s %
P
Display oP: P0 stands for Ignition point.
Bild 13/0707
Multistage operating mode: Current heating stage
V h min s %
P
Display oP: P1 stands for Stage 1.
Bild 14/0707
V h min s %
P
Bild 15/0707
V h min s %
P
Bild 16/0707

V h min s %
183/283

24.1.4 Fault status messages, display of errors and info
24.1.4.1. Display of errors (faults) with lockout
The display shows Loc:, the bar under the fault status
P
message appears.
Bild 17/0707
The LMV26 / LMV36 is in the lockout position.
V h min s %
P The display shows current error code c: alternating with

diagnostic code d: (refer to Flash code list).
Bild 18/0707
V h min s % Example: Error code 4 / diagnostic code 3
24.1.4.2. Reset
Press /reset for 1...3 s so that rESEt appears on the display.
When you release the button, the LMV26 / LMV36 is reset.
If you press /reset for >1 s or <1 s, the system returns to the
/reset
1…3 s former menu.
Exception:
If a fault occurs in connection with the curve setting, the
system returns to the parameter setting level.
24.1.4.3. Activating info / service mode from lockout
/reset
>3 s
P Press /reset for >3 s so that InFo, SEr and then OPErAtE
appear on the display.
Bild 21/0707
/reset
>5 s V h min s % When the button is released, a change to info / service
mode is made.
P
Bild 22/0707
/reset
>8 s V h min s %
184/283

24.1.4.4. Error with safety shutdown
The display shows Err:.

P
The LMV26 / LMV36 initiates safety shutdown.
Bild 23/0707
V h min s % The display shows current error code c: alternating with
diagnostic code d:.
Bild 24/0707
Press /reset to return to the normal display.
V h min s %
Example: Error code 12 / diagnostic code 0
24.1.4.5. General information
The LMV26 / LMV36 displays an event which does not

lead to
shutdown.
The display shows current error code c: alternating with

diagnostic code d:.
Press /reset to return to the former menu.
Example: Error code 111 / diagnostic ode 0
 Note
For meaning of the error and diagnostic codes, refer to chapter Error code list.
When an error has been acknowledged, it can still be read out from the error history.
24.1.4.6. Prevention of startup
OFF UPr appears if a LMV26 / LMV36 was not

P programmed or not completely parameterized, or its
Bild 196/0208
operating mode was reset or changed.

The display shows OFF UPr0 or OFF UPr1, depending
V h min s % on the type of fuel currently burnt.
24.1.4.7. Safety loop
P OFF S appears if a LMV26 / LMV36 safety loop and / or

Bild 197/0208
burner flange contact is open, and a load controller ON

signal is present.
V h min s %
185/283

25 Menu-driven operation
25.1 Assignment of levels
The various levels can be accessed via different button combinations. The parameter
level can only be accessed via password.
Normal display
>1 s
/reset
Change to
normal display
>3 s
Info level <8 s
/reset
>3 s or
<8 s
/reset
or
automatic
return after timeout
Service level of menu operation
(parameter 127)
>8 s
>1 s
Parameter level
Figure 106: Assignment of levels
186/283

26 Info level
26.1 Display of info level
Press /reset until InFo appears.

/reset
1…3 s When releasing /reset , you are on the info level.
The info level displays information about the LMV26 / LMV36 and about operation in
general.
 Note
On the info level, you can press or to display the next or the previous parameter.
Instead of pressing , you can also press /reset for <1 second.
 Note
Press or /reset for >8 seconds to return to the normal display.
 Note!
No change of values on the info level!
P If the display shows . _ . _ below the parameter value, the
Bild 27e/0807
value may consist of more than 5 digits.
V h min s %
The value is displayed by pressing /reset for >1 s and <3 s.
Parameter Parameter value
Figure 107: Info level
Press /reset for >3 s or press to return to the
selection of the parameter number (parameter no. flashes).
No. Parameter
Info level
167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal]
162 Operating hours resettable
164 Number of startups resettable
165 Fuel 0: Number of startups
177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal)
172 Fuel 1: Operation hours resettable
174 Fuel 1: Number of startups resettable
175 Fuel 1: Number of startups
163 Operating hours when LMV26 / LMV36 is live
166 Total number of startups
113 Burner identification
107 Software version
108 Software variant
102 Identification date
103 Identification number
104 Preselected parameter set: Customer code
105 Preselected parameter set: Version
143 Reserved
End
187/283

26.2 Display of info values (examples)
26.2.1 Identification date
The identification date described below corresponds to the creation date for the program
sequence and cannot be changed by the user.
The display shows parameter 102: flashing on the

P
left, characters ._._ on the right.
Bild 29/0707
V h min s %
Example: 102: ._._
Pressing the button /reset (1…3 seconds) and

P
releasing it when ._._ flashes displays the
Bild 30/0707
identification date (creation date of the program
/reset /reset
1…3 s sequence) DD.MM.YY.
V h min s %
Example: Identification date 03.11.05
P
/reset
Bild 29/0707
or Press the /reset or button to return to the

display of parameters.
V h min s %
To the next parameter
26.2.2 Identification number

P
left, identification number 0 on the right.
Bild 31/0707
V h min s % Example: 103: 0
Back to the previous

or /reset parameter
<1 s
188/283

26.2.3 Burner identification

P
left, characters ._._ on the right.
Bild 32/0707
V h min s % Example: 113: ._._
Press /reset for 1…3 s to show the burner’s

P identification.
Bild 33/0707
/reset
Default setting: - - - - - - - -
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: 3
P
/reset
Bild 32/0707
or Press /reset or to return to the display of
parameters.
V h min s %
The burner’s identification can be set on the parameter level!

parameter
189/283

26.2.4 Number of startups resettable
 Note!
Can be deleted for service refer to chapter Parameter list!

left, characters ._._ on the right, since display of
P
the number of startups may comprise more than 5
Bild 34/0707
digits.
V h min s %
Example: Parameter 164: ._._
P Pressing the button /reset (1…3 seconds) and

releasing it when ._._ flashes displays the number
Bild 35/0707
/reset of startups (can be reset).
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: 36
P
/reset
Bild 34/0707
or Press /reset or to show parameter 164

flashing again.
V h min s %
The number of startups can be reset on the parameter level!

parameter
190/283

26.2.5 Total number of startups

left, characters ._._ on the right, since the display
P
of the total number of startups may comprise
Bild 36/0707
more than 5 digits.
V h min s %
Example: Parameter 166: ._._
P Pressing the button /reset (1…3 seconds) and

releasing it when ._._ flashes displays the total
Bild 37/0707
/reset number of startups.
1…3 s V h min s %
Example: 56
P
/reset
Bild 36/0707
or Press /reset or to return to the display of
parameters.
V h min s %

parameter
26.2.6 End of info level
When this display appears, you have reached the

P
end of the info level.
Bild 38/0707
V h min s % The display shows – End – flashing.
To the start of the info level To end of info level

or /reset
<1 s
or P
Press or /reset (>8 seconds) to return to
Bild 22/0707
the operating mode display

V h min s %
/reset OPErAtE appears for a short moment.
>3 s
P When this display appears, you are back on the

normal display and you can change to the next
Bild 9/0707
level mode.
V h min s %
Press /reset to switch between

the service and the
/reset parameter level.
191/283

27 Service level
The service level is used to display information about errors including the error history
and information about the LMV26 / LMV36.
 Note
When on the service level, you can press or to display the next or the previous
parameter.
Instead of pressing , you can also press /reset for <1 s.
 Note
Press or /reset for >3 s to return to the normal display.
 Note!
No change of values on the service level.
P
If characters ._._ are displayed by the parameter, the
Bild 39e/0807
value may consist of more than 5 digits.

V h min s %
Press /reset for >1 s and <3 s to display the value.
Parameter Parameter value
Figure 108: Service level
Press /reset for >3 s or to return to the selection
of the parameter number (parameter number flashes).
27.1 Display of service level
P
Press /reset for >3 s until SEr appears.
Bild 21/0707
/reset
V h min s % When releasing /reset , you are on the service level.
No. Parameter
Service level
954 Intensity of flame
960 Actual flow rate (fuel throughput in m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h)
945 Actual fuel
0 = fuel 0
1 = fuel 1
121 Manual output
Undefined = automatic operation
922 Incremental position of actuators
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
161 Number of faults
701 Error history: 701-725.01.Code
● Error history: 701-725.02.Diagnostic code
● Error history: 701-725.03.Error class
● Error history: 701-725.04.Phase
● Error history: 701-725.05.Startup counter
● Error history: 701-725.06.Output
● Error history: 701-725.07.Fuel
725 Error history: Oldest error in the history
192/283

27.2 Display of service values (example)
27.2.1 Number of faults
The display shows parameter 161: flashing on

P
the left, the number of faults that occurred thus
Bild 40/0707
far on the right 0.
V h min s %
Example: Parameter 161: 0

or /reset parameter
<1 s
27.2.2 Error history
Refer to chapter Parameter with index, without direct display/Example of parameter 701:
Error history!
 Note
Can be deleted for service (refer to chapter Parameter list)!
27.2.3 Intensity of flame

P left.
On the right, the flame’s intensity is displayed as
Bild 41/0707
a percentage.
V h min s % Example: 954: 0.0

or /reset parameter
<1 s
 Note
Also refer to chapter Intensity of flame during curve settings.
27.2.4 End of service level
P When this display appears, you have reached the

end of the service level.
Bild 38/0707
Display – End – appears flashing.

V h min s %
To the start of the service To the end of the service

level level
P
Press to return to the normal display.
Bild 22/0707
OPErAtE appears for a short moment.

V h min s %
P When this display appears, you are back on the

normal display and you can change to the next
Bild 9/0707
level mode.
V h min s %
193/283

28 Parameter level
The parameters stored in the LMV26 / LMV36 can be displayed or changed on the
parameter level.
The change to the parameter level requires a password.
Siemens supplies the LMV26 / LMV36 with the factory settings according to Type
summary.
The OEM can change the Siemens default settings to match his own requirements.
With the LMV26 / LMV36, the basic unit’s characteristics are determined primarily
through parameter settings. Every time the unit is recommissioned, the parameter
settings must be checked. The LMV26 / LMV36 must never be transferred from one
plant to another without matching the unit’s parameters to the new plant.
Caution!
Parameters and settings may only be changed by qualified personnel.
If parameters are changed, responsibility for the new parameter settings is assumed
by the person who – in accordance with the access rights – has made parameter
changes on the respective access level.
After parameterization, the OEM must check to ensure that safe burner operation is
warranted.
The OEM which made the settings is always responsible for the parameters, their
settings and compliance of the respective application with the relevant national and
international standards and safety regulations, such as EN 267, EN 676, EN 1643,
EN 746-2 etc.
Siemens, its suppliers and other Group Companies of Siemens AG do not assume
responsibility for special or indirect damage, consequential damage, other damage, or
damage resulting from wrong parameter settings.
Warning!
If the factory settings are changed, all changes made must be documented and
checked by the OEM.
The OEM is obliged to mark the LMV26 / LMV36 accordingly and to include at least
the list of device parameters and settings in the burner’s documentation.
Siemens also recommends attaching an additional mark on the LMV26 / LMV36 in the
form of an adhesive label. According to EN 298, the label should be easy to read and
wipe proof.
The label with a maximum size of 70 mm x 45 mm can be attached to the upper part
of the housing.
Example of label: OEM logo

Type / part no.: 1234567890ABCD
Caution! OEM settings:

Parameter
225 = 30 s (t1) 226 = 2 s (t3)
230 = 10 s (t4) 234 = 0 s (t8)
240 = 1 (repetition)
257 = 2 s (t3n) TSA = t3n + 0.7 s
259 = 30 s (t11)
260 = 30 s (t12)
194/283

28.1 Entry of password
 Note
The OEM’s password must consist of 5 characters, the heating engineer’s of 4
characters.
P
Press button combination to display
Bild 42/0707
CodE.
1s V h min s %
When releasing the buttons, 7 bars appear the

first of which flashes.
or Press or to select a number or letter.
/reset
Press /reset to confirm the value.
or The value entered changes to a minus sign (–).
The next bar starts flashing.
/reset
or Press or to select a number or letter.
After entry of the last character, the password
must be confirmed by pressing /reset .
Press /reset again to end the password entry.

/reset
Example: Password consisting of 4

characters.
195/283

P
As a confirmation of correct entry, PArA appears for a
Bild 48/0707
maximum of 2 seconds.
V h min s %
 Note!
For entry of passwords or burner IDs, the following numbers and letters can be used:
=1 =A =L
=2 =b =n
=3 =C =o
=4 =d =P
=5 =E =r
=6 =F =S
=7 =G =t
=8 =H =u
=9 =I =Y
=0 =J
196/283

28.2 Entry of burner identification
The burner’s identification is entered like a password (character by character), but from
right to left and ending with «_».

P
Bild 49/0707
V h min s % Press /reset to go to editing mode.
/reset
P You are on the display for undefined burner

identification.
Bild 50/0707
8 bars appear.
V h min s %
P
Press or to select a number.
or Bild 51/0707 Example: Number 3 flashes.
V h min s %
/reset
P
Press /reset to confirm the value.
Bild 52/0707
V h min s % Make the entry number by number.
P
Press or to select the next number.
Bild 53/0707
or Example: Number 9 flashes.

V h min s %
/reset



After entry of the last number, burner
P
identification must be confirmed by pressing
Bild 54/0707
/reset
V h min s % /reset .
197/283

P
The display no longer flashes.
Bild 55/0707
Example: Burner identification 9993
V h min s %
P
Press to return to the parameter level.
Bild 49/0707
V h min s %
PArAmeter 113: for burner identification.
198/283

28.3 Change of heating engineer’s password
Note!
 For the OEM to change the heating engineer’s password, c: requires entry of the OEM
password!
VSD Press button combination to display

000: Int.
F A
>1 s
Pressing the /reset button takes you to parameter
041 heating engineer's password.
Press /reset to go to level c: for password

changes.
Letter n: for new appears flashing.
Proceed as described in chapter Entry of

password and enter the new password (4
characters).
/reset
After entry of the last character, the password
Letter r: for repeat appears flashing.
Proceed as described in chapter Entry of

password and repeat entry of the new password.
/reset After entry of the last character, the password
SEt confirms that the new password has been

7782z98/0416
saved.
Pressing the /reset button takes you to parameter

041 heating engineer's password.
Continue in the parameter

End of the parameter level
level to the next parameter
–End–
group 100:
199/283

28.4 Change of OEM’s password
Press /reset to go to level c: for password changes.
Letter n: for new appears flashing.
Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

enter the new password (5 characters).
/reset After entry of the last character, the password must be
confirmed by pressing /reset .
Letter r: for repeat appears flashing.
Proceed as described in chapter Entry of password and

repeat entry of the new password.
/reset After entry of the last character, the password must be
confirmed by pressing /reset .

7782z98/0416
SEt confirms that the new password has been saved.
Parameter 042: flashes again.
200/283

28.5 Use of parameter level
The parameters stored in the LMV26 / LMV36 can be displayed and changed on the
parameter level.
Normally, all parameters have been set by the burner manufacturer – with the exception
of those for the fuel train and for fuel-air ratio control.
A description of parameter level 400, which is used for setting the fuel train and the fuel-
air ratio curve, is given in chapter Fuel-air ratio curves – settings and commissioning.
VSD
Press button combination to display
000: Int.
F A
>1 s With , select the parameter group 100:
PArA.
With , select the parameter group 200:

PArA.
Pressing the /reset button takes you to

parameter 201: Burner operating mode.
201/283

28.6 Structure of parameter levels
The parameters are assigned to different levels.
/reset
Internal parameter
(password level)
Entering the password
/reset
/reset
Basic unit
/reset
Basic unit
Fuel-air ratio curves

(primary setting)
/reset
Bild 384e/1209
/reset
Fuel air ratio
/reset
Actuators
/reset
Error history
/reset
Process data
Figure 109: Structure of parameter levels
Note
 The following sections explain the operating philosophy behind the parameter levels using a
number of examples.
Caution!
Pay special attention to chapter Safety notes on settings and parameter settings!
202/283

28.7 Parameters without index, with direct display
28.7.1 Using the example of parameter 208: Program stop
PArAmeter level 200: for LMV26 / LMV36.
Press /reset to go to menu

/reset level 200:
P Press to select Program stop.
Bild 64/0707
Display: Parameter 208: flashes, value 0 does
V h min s % not.
/reset
Press /reset to go to editing mode.

P Display:
Bild 65/0707
Program stop time set

Here: Value 0
V h min s %  corresponding to program stop
deactivated.
Press or to select the required

program stop time.
P 0 = deactivated
Bild 66/0707
or 2 = ignition position (phase 36)

V h min s % 3 = interval 1 (phase 44)
Example: 2 ignition position (phase 36)
203/283

Adopt the value!
 /reset
 Discard the change!
P P
Bild 67/0707
Bild 68/0707
V h min s % V h min s %
Press to return to the parameter

Press /reset to return to editing mode.
level.
The value set is adopted.
Display: Parameter 208: flashes, value 0
does not.
Note
 To detect potential display errors, the

value is displayed 1 place shifted to the
right.
Display: Value 2
P
Bild 69/0707
PArAmeter 208: flashes, value 2 does not.

V h min s %
PArAmeter 200: for LMV26 / LMV36.

To the next parameter level
parameter level
204/283

28.8 Parameters without index, with no direct display
(with parameters having a value range >5 digits)
28.8.1 Using the example of parameter 162: Operating hours resettable
P
PArAmeter level 100: for general.
Bild 70/0707
V h min s %
Press /reset to go to menu

/reset level 100:.
Press to select Operating hours

P resettable.
Bild 71/0707
Display: Parameter 162: flashes, characters
V h min s % ._._ do not.
/reset
P
Bild 72/0707
V h min s % Display: 123457
P You can press or to set the number of

operating hours to 0.
Biod 73/0707
or
V h min s % Display: Operating hours 0 flashes.
205/283

Adopt the value!
 /reset
P P
Bild 65/0707
Bild 74/0707

level.
The value set will be adopted.
Display: Parameter 162: flashes, characters
._._ do not.
Note

right.
Display: Value 0
P
Bild 70/0707
PArAmeter 100: for general.

V h min s %
206/283

28.9 Parameter with index, with direct display
28.9.1 Using the example of parameter 501: No-flame positions fuel actuator
P
PArAmeter level 500: for fuel-air ratio
Bild 75/0707
control.
V h min s %
/reset
P Press /reset to go to menu level 500:.
Bild 76/0707
Display: Parameter 501. flashes, index 00:
V h min s % and value 0.0 do not.
/reset
P Press /reset to go to the index.

Bild 77/0707
Display: Parameter 501. does not flash, index

V h min s % 00: flashes, value 0.0 does not.
Press o to select the required

index.
P .00 = home position

Bild 78/0707
or .01 = prepurge position

.02 = postpurge position
V h min s %
Display: Index 01: for prepurge position
flashes, value 0.0 does not.
/reset
P
Bild 79/0707
V h min s % Display: Value 0.0
P Press or to select the required

prepurge position.
Bild 80/0707
or
V h min s % Example: 1.0
207/283

Adopt the value!
 /reset
P P
Bild 81/0707
Bild 78/0707
Press to return to the index.

Display: Parameter 501. does not flash,
The value set will be adopted.
index 01: flashes, value 0.0 has not
changed and does not flash.
Note

right.
Display: Value 1.0
P Press to return to the index.

Bild 82/0707
PArAmeter 501: does not flash, index 01:

V h min s % flashes, value 1.0 does not.

P
level.
Bild 83/0707
Display: Parameter 501. flashes, index 00:

V h min s %
and value 0.0 do not.
P Press to return to the parameter

level.
Bild 75/0707
V h min s % PArAmeter 500: for fuel-air ratio control.
208/283

28.10 Parameters with index, with no direct display
28.10.1 Using the example of parameter 701: Errors
Refer to chapter Error code list!
 Note
Can be deleted for service, refer to chapter Parameter list!
P
HIStory 700: for error history.
Bild 84/0707
V h min s %
Press /reset to go to the

/reset parameter level.
P Bild 85/0707
Press to select parameter 701.
Display: Parameter 701. flashes, index 01: and value 201

V h min s % do not.
/reset
P Press /reset to go to index 01:.

Bild 86/0707
Display: Parameter 701. does not flash, index 01:

V h min s % flashes, value 201 does not.

To the next index
index
Press to select the index:

.01 = error code
.02 = diagnostic code
.03 = error class
P .04 = error phase
Bild 87/0707
.05 = startup counter

.06 = output
V h min s %
Example:
Parameter 701., index 05: for startup counter, diagnostic
code ._._
209/283

/reset
P
Press /reset to go to display mode.
Bild 88/0707
V h min s % Display: Value 56
P Press to return to the index.
Bild 87/0707
Display: Parameter 701. does not flash, index 05:
V h min s % flashes, characters ._._ do not.
P Press to return to the parameter level.

Bild 89/0707
Display: Parameter 701. flashes index 05: does not,

V h min s % characters ._._ do not.
To the next older error




Parameters cover the period of time back to the last error
P since history was deleted (max. to parameter 725.)
Bild 90/0707
Example:
V h min s % Parameter 725., index 01:, error code 111

parameter
P
When this display appears, you have reached the end of
the error history index.
Bild 91/0707

V h min s %
210/283

or /reset parameter
<1 s
P
When this display appears, you have reached the end of
the error history.
Bild 92/0707
V h min s %
P
Bild 93/0707
HISt 700: for error history
V h min s %

or /reset parameter
<1 s
 Note
If you wish, you can delete the error history via parameter 130.
To delete the display, set the parameter to 1 and then to 2.
The error history is deleted when the parameter returns to 0.
211/283

28.11 Fuel-air ratio curves – settings and commissioning
P
The display shows 400: flashing on the left,
Bild 94/0707
SEt appears on the right.
V h min s %
28.11.1 Initial commissioning
P An unprogrammed LMV26 / LMV36 or a LMV26 /

LMV36 whose operating mode has been reset or
Bild 95/0707
changed displays OFF UPr0 or OFF UPr1.
V h min s %
For initial commissioning, change to the parameter level (refer to chapter Operation).
The settings can then be made on parameter level 400.
P
Bild 94/0707
Press /reset to select parameter 400 for initial

/reset commissioning and for setting fuel-air ratio control.
V h min s %
P Press /reset to go to the settings for fuel-air ratio control

Bild 96/0707
and parameter 201 for selecting the operating mode.

/reset
V h min s % 201: appears flashing.
212/283

 Note
Ensure that the fuel train is correctly set in compliance with the type of burner used.
No. Parameter Actuator controlled

Air Fuel
201 Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, ● ●
actuators, etc.)
-- = undefined (delete curves) ● ●
1 = gas modulating (G mod) ● ●
2 = gas modulating with pilot valve (Gp1 mod) ● ●
3 = gas modulating with pilot valve (Gp2 mod) ● ●
4 = oil modulating (Lo mod) ● ●
5 = oil 2-stage (Lo 2 stage) ● ---
6 = oil 3-stage (Lo 3 stage) ● ---
7 = gas modulating (G mod pneu) ● ---
8 = gas modulating (Gp1 mod pneu) ● ---
9 = gas modulating (Gp2 mod pneu) ● ---
10 = oil modulating with pilot valve (LoGp mod) ● ●
11 = oil 2-stage with pilot valve (LoGp 2-stage) ● ---
12 = oil modulating with 2 fuel valves (Lo mod 2 fuel ● ●
valves)
13 = oil modulating with pilot valve and 2 fuel valves (LoGp ● ●
mod 2 fuel valves)
14 = gas modulating pneumatic without actuator (G mod --- ---
pneu without actuator, 0 active)
15 = gas modulating pneumatic with pilot valve without --- ---
actuator (Gp1 mod pneu without actuator, 0 active)
16 = gas modulating pneumatic with pilot valve without --- ---
actuator (Gp2 mod pneu without actuator, 0 active)
17 = oil 2-stage without actuator (Lo 2-stage without --- ---
actuator, 0 active)
18 = oil 3-stage without actuator (Lo 3-stage without --- ---
actuator, 0 active)
19 = gas modulating only gas actuator (G mod only gas --- ●
actuator, fuel active)
20 = gas modulating with pilot valve only gas actuator --- ●
(Gp1 mod only gas actuator, fuel active)
21 = gas modulating with pilot valve only gas actuator --- ●
(Gp2 mod only gas actuator, fuel active)
22 = oil modulating only oil actuator (Lo mod only oil --- ●
actuator, fuel active)
23 = heavy oil modulating with circulation control (Ho mod ● ●
separate circulation control ¹)
24 = heavy oil 2-stage with circulation control (Ho 2 stage ● ---
separate circulation control ¹)
25 = heavy oil modulation without circulation control (Ho ● ●
mod without circulation control) ¹)
26 = heavy oil 2-stage without circulation control (Ho 2 ● ---
stage without circulation control) ¹)
27 = heavy oil 3-stage without circulation control (Ho 3 ● ---
stage without circulation control) ¹)
28 = gas modulating mechanical only air actuator (G mod ● ---
mech only fuel active, fuel active)
29 = gas modulating mechanical with pilot valve only air ● ---
actuator (Gp2 mod mech only air actuator, fuel active)
213/283

P
Bild 97/0707
/reset
V h min s %
Press or to select the required

P setting.
Bild 98/0707
or
Example: 3 for gas modulating with pilot valve
V h min s % (Gp2 mod)
Bild 161/0807
Press /reset to save the selected setting.
/reset
V h min s %
Bild 99/0707
V h min s %
P Press /reset to change to parameter 542: to

activate the VSD / PWM fan.
Bild 100/0807
You can choose:

/reset
V h s min % 0 = VSD / PWM fan OFF
1 = VSD / PWM fan ON

parameter
Press to change to parameter 641: to

control speed standardization of the VSD.
You can choose:
P 0 = speed standardization of VSD OFF
1 = speed standardization of VSD ON
Bild 101/0807
After setting speed standardization to 1,

V h s min % standardization of the VSD commences. If
successful, the parameter is reset to 0.
Negative values indicate errors (refer to chapter
Automatic speed standardization).
 For operating modes 1…4, 7…10, 12…16 and 19…22, refer to chapter Setting curvepoints P0 and P9
for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)
 For operating modes 5, 6, 11, 17 and 18, refer to chapter Setting the curvepoints for multistage mode
(«Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»)
214/283

28.11.2 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for modulating operation («G mod»,
«Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)
 Note
Not all actuators used in the following example can be set, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Example of «G mod»
P Display P0 appears blinking.
Bild 102/0707
Curvepoint for ignition load.
V h min s %
P Keep depressed.
Bild 103/0707
You are now in setting P0 of fuel setting F for
V h min s % ignition position P0.
P Press simultaneously and or to set

ignition position P0 of the fuel damper.
Bild 104/0707
and
or V h min s % Example: 30.0
Release .
P
Bild 105/0707
The selected value is adopted.
P Keep depressed.
Bild 106/0707
You are now in setting P0 of air actuator A for

V h min s % ignition position P0.
P Press simultaneously and or to set

ignition position P0 of the air actuator.
Bild 107/0707
and
or V h min s % Example: 22.0
Release .
P
Bild 108/0707
P Keep and depressed.

Bild 109/0807
You are now in setting n0, speed n is for ignition

and
position n0
V h s min %
215/283

and P Press simultaneously and and
Bild 110/0807
and e or to adjust speed n0 of the VSD.
Example: 20.0
V h s min %
or
P Release and .
Bild 111/0807
Example: 20.0
V h s min %
To the next curvepoint
Press .
P9 appears blinking.
P
Bild 112/0707
Curvepoint for high-fire.
V h min s %
Same procedure as with P0
Note!
 If is pressed first, the display jumps to 90!

curvepoint
Press .
P The display shows run (identification of start

Bild 113/0707
for setting the curve parameters).

The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1 or
V h min s % run Oil0 or run Oil1, depending on the type
of fuel currently burnt or the type of fuel train.
 Note!
You now have the option of pressing /reset to proceed with the warm settings (see
section Warm settings for modulating operation «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
ESC
and «Lo mod») or pressing to proceed with the cold settings (see section
Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod») of the LMV26 /
LMV36.
28.11.3 Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu»
Note!
 Refer to chapter Setting curvepoints P0 and P9 for modulating operation («G

mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»)! Here, only the air requires
adjustment with .
216/283

28.11.4 Warm settings for modulating operation («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
mod» and «Lo mod»)
 Note
With the warm settings, the burner is started up after pressing the Info button. Air-fuel ratio
control can now be accurately set while the flame is present. When traveling along the
precalculated curve to high-fire point P9, all intermediate curvepoints (P2…P8) must be set.
Automatic operation is released when – after reaching P9 – the curve settings are quit by
pressing ESC. If the curve settings are aborted earlier (ESC or shutdown due to fault),
prevention of startup OFF UPr continues to be active until all points are set.
If required, the gas pressure can be set at the high-fire point. In case the gas pressure is
changed, all points must be checked by traveling along the curve downward and – if required
– readjusted.
P
Identification of start for setting the curve parameters.
The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1 or run Oil0
Bild 113/0707
or run Oil1, depending on the type of fuel currently
burnt or the type of fuel train.
V h min s %
When there is a request for heat.

/reset
 Note
If, during the time the curve is parameterized, an error occurs which leads to safety shutdown,
parameterization of the curve is quit.
P
Bild 114/0707
Phase Standby (stationary)
V h min s %
P
Phase Fan ramp up
Bild 10/0707
(fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)

V h min s %
P
Bild 115/0707
Phase Traveling to prepurge position
V h min s %
P
Bild 116/0707
Phase Prepurging
V h min s %
217/283

P
Bild 117/0707
Phase Traveling to ignition position
V h min s %
Wait until the burner is operating and symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted!

The startup sequence stops in phase 36 Traveling to ignition position.
The ignition point can be adjusted under cold conditions.
Ignition position P0 can only be set after symbol

or ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and
For fuel, keep depressed, for air , as
or P
as well as well as for VSD and
Bild 118/0707
Press or to adjust the value.
V h min s %
and
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
and
the next curvepoint P1 can be selected with
or .
P
Bild 117/0707
V h min s %
P
Bild 119/0707
Phase Preignition
V h min s %
P
Bild 120/0707
Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)
V h min s %
P
Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer OFF),
Bild 121/0707
preignition time OFF

V h min s %
P
Bild 122/0707
Phase Interval 1
V h min s %
218/283

Starting the warm settings
Ignition position P0 can only be set when

or symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and
or P
Bild 118/0707
V h min s %
and
and
or .
Low-fire position P1 can only be set when

symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
or
and The value is adopted from P0.
or P For fuel, keep depressed, for air , as

as well as Bild 123/0707
well as for VSD and

V h min s % Press or to adjust the value.
and
and
or
.

curvepoint
P
When changing from P1 to P2 for the first time,
curvepoints P2…P8 automatically calculated
Bild 124/0707
and saved.
CALC appears for a short moment.
V h min s %
219/283

Air
Figure 110: Setting the curvepoints
 Note
Curvepoints P2 to P8 are automatically computed as a straight line between P1 and P9.
Example 1 = gas modulating
P0, P1 and P9 are set as described: Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

fuel air
P0 30.0 22.0
P1 32.0 24.0
P9 80.0 90.0
P2 through P8 have automatically been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

calculated: fuel air
P2 38.0 32.3
P3 44.0 40.5
P4 50.0 48.8
P5 56.0 57
P6 62.0 65.3
P7 68.0 73.5
P8 74.0 81.8
220/283

Continue the same way with P2 through P9!
High-fire position P9 can only be set when

or symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted.
and If required, readjust the gas pressure.
or P
Bild 125/0707
V h min s %
and
and
or .
After setting the high-fire (P9), either a change to parameter 546 (automatic operation) can be made
(ESC) or all curvepoints can be run through in the reverse order.
If the gas pressure is changed, all points must be checked and – if required – readjusted.
The maximum capacity is displayed.

If the display shows - - - -, the maximum
P capacity has not yet been specified.
The LMV26 / LMV36 can be run up to 100%.
Bild 126/0707
V h min s %
You can press /reset to go to editing mode,
enabling you to change the maximum capacity.
The minimum capacity is displayed.

If the display shows - - - -, the minimum
P capacity has not yet been entered.
The LMV26 / LMV36 can be run down to 20%.
Bild 127/0707
V h min s %
You can press /reset to go to editing mode,
enabling you to change the minimum capacity.
Completing parameterization Back to the previous

of the curve parameter
221/283

P
When symbol ▼ or ▲ is no longer highlighted, you can
Bild 94/0707
press ESC a second time.
V h min s %
Bild 128/0707
V h min s %
The warm settings for fuel-air ratio control by the LMV26 / LMV36 are now completed.
28.11.5 Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu»
and «Gp2 mod pneu»)
Note
 Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
and «Lo mod»)! Here, only the air requires adjustment with .
28.11.6 Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod»
Note
Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
 and «Lo mod»)!
With no flame, however, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the settings have
been made.
If run is shown in the display, the following must be observed:
P
Identification of start for setting the curve.
The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1 or
Bild 113/0707
run Oil0 or run Oil1 depending on the active

V h min s %
fuel type.
Note!
 You now have the option of pressing to continue with the cold setting for
the LMV26 / LMV36.
222/283

28.11.7 Cold settings for «G mod pneu», «Gp1 mod pneu» and «Gp2 mod
pneu»
Note
Refer to chapter Warm settings for modulating mode («G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2
 mod» and «Lo mod»)!
With no flame, however, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the
settings have been made. Here, only the air requires adjustment with .
P Identification of start for setting the curve.
Bild 113/0707
The display shows run Gas0 or run Gas1
depending on the active fuel type.
V h min s %
Note!
the LMV26 / LMV36.
223/283

28.11.8 Interpolation of curvepoints
 Note
Changing a curvepoint in the cold position requires a new approach to all
curvepoints in the warm position to verify the change on the burner itself. After
changing the curvepoint, the normal display of the AZL2 shows OFF UPr0 / OFF
UPr1.
To the next curvepoint or to select the curvepoint
Bild 129/0707
The selected curvepoint is displayed.
V h min s %
P Keep depressed.
Bild 130/0707
The fuel actuator has been selected for
V h min s % changing.
Keep depressed and press or to

adjust the fuel actuator.
P
Bild 131/0707
and In the case of warm settings, the actuator

follows directly the adjustments made.
or V h min s %
The changes are saved.
P
After releasing , the point is selected
Bild 132/0707
again.
V h min s %
P Keep depressed.
Bild 133/0707
The air actuator has been selected for editing.

V h min s %
Keep depressed and press or to

adjust the air actuator.
P
Bild 134/0707
and In the case of warm settings, the actuator

follows directly the adjustments made.
or V h min s %
The changes are saved.
P
After releasing , the point is selected
Bild 135/0707
again.
V h min s %

curvepoint
224/283

28.11.9 Interpolating the curvepoints
/reset
P
Identification of start for setting the curve
Bild 113/0707
parameters.
V h min s %
Example 1 = gas modulating
P0, P1 and P9 are set as described: Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

fuel air
P0 30.0 22.0
P1 32.0 24.0
P9 80.0 90.0
P2 through P8 have automatically been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

calculated: fuel air
P2 38.0 32.3
P3 44.0 40.5
P4 50.0 48.8
P5 56.0 57
P6 62.0 65.3
P7 68.0 73.5
P8 74.0 81.8
P5 shall now be changed:
/reset
P
Bild 136/0707
V h min s %
P Keep or depressed.

Bild 137/0707
or
Example:
V h min s %
P Press o to change the value as

or
required.
Bild 138/0707
and

or
225/283

or P Press or to change the value as
Bild 139/0807
and required.
Example: 00.0
or V h s min %
Release or .
P
Bild 140/0707
The required value is adopted.
or
V h min s % Example: P5:50.0:46.0
P Keep depressed for >3 s.
Bild 124/0707
>3 s CALC appears.
V h min s %
7´Bild 141/0707
The display jumps to P6.
V h min s %
All curvepoints from P5 to P9 have now been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

automatically recalculated (linear interpolation): fuel air
P5 50.0 46.0
P6 57.5 57.0
P7 65.0 68.0
P8 72.0 79.0
P9 80.0 90.0
P Keep depressed for >3 s.

Bild 124/0707
>3 s CALC appears.

V h min s %
P
Bild 142/0707
The display jumps to P4.
V h min s %
All curvepoints from P1 to P5 have now been Curvepoint Value 1 Value 2

automatically recalculated (linear interpolation): fuel air
P5 50.0 46.0
P4 45.5 40.0
P3 41.0 35.0
P2 36.5 29.5
P1 32.0 24.0
226/283

P
Bild 124/0707
>3 s >3 s
V h min s %
If it is not only the current curvepoint that shall be changed, but all other points in the direction of travel as
well, a new straight line from the current point to P9 (press ) or P1 (press ) can be calculated by
a long push on or .
Display CALC
Example of presentation
P5 up to P9
CALC + Keep
depressed for >3 s
)
CALC - P5 down to P1
Keep
depressed for >3 s
Figure 111: Changing several curvepoints
 Note
Due to interpolation, a number of curvepoints change. The curvepoints
changed must be approached while using the warm settings to be able to
make a check on the burner. If these points have not yet been completely
approached, the normal display of the AZL2 shows OFF UPr 0 / OFF UPr1.
227/283

28.11.10 Setting of curvepoints for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-
stage»)
Example of «Lo 2-stage»
P
P0 appears blinking.
Bild 143/0707
Curvepoint for ignition load.
V h min s %
P
Keep depressed.
Bild 144/0707
You are now at P0 of air actuator A.
V h min s %
P Press simultaneously and or to
Bild 145/0707
and adjust ignition position P0 of the air actuator.
Example: 20.0
or V h min s %
P
Keep and depressed.
Bild 146/0807
and You are now at n0 of the VSD.

V h min s %
and P Press simultaneously and and

Bild 147/0807
and or to adjust speed n0 of the VSD.

Example: 20.0
or V h min s %
P Now, release .
Bild 148/0707

Example: 20.0
V h min s %
P
parameters.
Bild 113/0707
The display shows run Oil0 or run Oil1,

V h min s %
depending on the type of fuel currently burnt.
 Note!
You now have the option of pressing /reset to proceed with the warm settings (see
section Warm settings for modulating operation «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod»
ESC
and «Lo mod») or pressing to proceed with the cold settings (see section
Cold settings for «G mod», «Gp1 mod», «Gp2 mod» and «Lo mod») of the LMV26 /
LMV36.
228/283

28.11.11 Warm settings for «Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»
P
parameters.
Bild 113/0707
The display shows run Oil0 or run Oil1,
depending on the type of fuel currently burnt.
V h min s %
Provided the load controller is

enabled!
/reset
Bild 114/0707
Phase Standby (stationary)
V h min s %
P
Phase Fan ramp up
Bild 10/0707
(fan motor = ON, safety valve = ON)
V h min s %
P
Bild 115/0707
Phase Traveling to prepurge position
V h min s %
P
Bild 116/0707
Phase Prepurging
V h min s %
P
Bild 117/0707
V h min s %
Wait until the burner is operating and symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted! The startup sequence
stops in phase 36 Traveling to ignition position. The ignition point can be adjusted under cold
conditions.
Ignition position P0 can be set only when

and
or P Keep depressed and, for VSD and .

Bild 149/0707
al well as
and V h min s %
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer highlighted,
the next curvepoint P1 can be selected with .
or
229/283

P
Bild 117/0707
V h min s %
Bild 119/0707
Phase Preignition
V h min s %
Bild 120/0707
Phase 1st safety time (ignition transformer ON)
V h min s %
P Bild 122/0707
Phase Interval 1
V h min s %
Ignition position P0 can be set only when

and
Keep depressed and, for VSD and .
or P
Bild 149/0707
as well as
and V h min s %
When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
and
highlighted, the next curvepoint P1 can be
or selected with .
230/283

Low-fire position P1 can be set only when

Set stage 1 P1.
and
Fuel valve V1 is switched on.
Bild 150/0707
as well as
and V h min s %
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2on can be
or selected with .
Curvepoint P2on can be set only when


Set switch-on point stage 2 P2.
and
Fuel valve V2 is still off.
Bild 151/0707
as well as
and V h min s %
and When symbol ▲ or ▼ is no longer
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2_d can be
or selected with .

curvepoint
Curvepoint P2_d can be set only when

Fuel valve V2 is still off and the LMV26 / LMV36
remains at curvepoint P2on. Presetting of
and operating stage P2 with no travel, aimed at
cutting the operating time if there is shortage of
or P air.
Bild 152/0707
as well as
and V h min s %
and
or
selected with .
231/283

curvepoint
Curvepoint P2 can only be adjusted when


and Fuel valve V2 is switched on.
or P
Bild 153/0707
as well as
V h min s % Press or to adjust the value.

and
and
highlighted, the next curvepoint P2of can be
or
selected with .

curvepoint
Curvepoint P2of is now adjusted.
The LMV26 / LMV36 remains at P2.
Adjust the switch-off point with no travel.

P
Bild 154/0707
Now, the point is approached dynamically

when traveling from P2 to P1.
V h min s %

selected with .

curvepoint
Automatic mode is released when, after

reaching P1, the curve settings are quit with
P ESC.
Bild 155/0707
If the settings are aborted earlier (ESC or

shutdown due to fault), start prevention OFF
V h min s % UPr0 or OFF UPr1 is still active until all points
are set.
P
Bild 94/0707
ESC can be pressed a second time.

V h min s %
232/283

P
Bild 156/0707
V h min s %
The warm settings for fuel-air ratio control of the LMV26 / LMV36 have now been configured.
28.11.12 Cold settings for multistage mode («Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»)
Note
 Refer to chapters Warm settings for «Lo 2-stage» and «Lo 3-stage»!
But with no flame, no actuator travel and no automatic operation after the settings
have been made.
P Identification of start for setting the curve.
Bild 113/0707
The display shows run Oil0 or run Oil1
depending on the active fuel type.
V h min s %
Note!
the LMV26 / LMV36.
233/283

28.11.13 Intensity of flame during curve settings
When setting the curve and the curvepoint is displayed, you can press /reset to show the
intensity of flame. When pressing the button for >1 s, a change to parameter 954 is
made; when releasing the button, you return to the curvepoint.
Bild 123/0707
Example: Curvepoint Low-flame position P1.
V h min s %
Change to parameter 954

/reset
>1 s

The intensity of flame in % is shown on the right.
Example: 954: 0.0
P
Bild 123/0707
Release /reset to return to curvepoint Low-fire

/reset position P1.
V h min s %
234/283

29 Parameter list LMV26/ LMV36
Abbreviations for password level:
GA Building automation
HF Heating engineer
HF (GA) Heating engineer (building automation)
IS Info / service
OEM Manufacturer of the individual product
Par. Parameter Number of Type Edit Value range Increment Default setting Password level
no. elements Min. Max. write read
000 Internal parameters
041 Password heating engineer (HF) (4 characters) 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 65535 1 OEM OEM
042 OEM password (5 characters) 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 65535 1 OEM OEM
050 Backup / Restore via AZL2 / PC software ACS410 starting 2 Std_s8 Edit -99 50 1 0; 0 HF HF
(parameterizing on 1)
Index 0 = store backup
Index 1 = start restore
055 Burner ID of AZL2 backup data record 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 99999999 1 0 --- HF
056 ASN summary of AZL2 backup data record 8 Std_u8 Read only 0 127 1 0 --- HF
057 Software version when setting the AZL2 backup data record 1 Hex_16 Read only 0x100 0xFFF9 1 0 --- HF
100 General
102 Identification date 1 Date Read only 0 255 1 --- IS
103 Identification number 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 65535 1 --- IS
104 Preselected parameter set: Customer code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 9 --- IS
105 Preselected parameter set: Version 1 Hex_16 Read only 0 0xFFFF 1 LMV26.300A2: V 01.06 --- IS
LMV36.300A2: V 01.01
107 Software version 1 Hex_16 Read only 0x100 0xFFF9 1 V 03.70 --- IS
108 Software variant 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 1 --- IS
111 ASN summary for verification with AZL2 backup data restore 8 Std_u8 Read only 0 127 1 0 --- HF
113 Burner identification 1 Std_s32 Edit 0 99999999 1 undefined IS HF
121 Manual output 1 Output Edit/ 0% 100% 0,1% undefined IS IS
Undefined = automatic mode erasable
123 Minimum output positioning step 3 Output Edit 0% 100% 0,1% Index Value HF HF
Index 0 = output building automation 0 0%
Index 1 = output external load controller analog 1 1%
235/283

29 Parameter list LMV26/ LMV36 17.12.2018
Index 2 = Power of external load controller contacts 2 0%
124 Loss of flame test (TÜV test) starting (parameterized on 1) 1 Std_s8 Edit -6 1 1 0 HF HF
(switch off the fuel valves  loss of flame)
125 Mains frequency 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF HF
0 = 50 Hz
1 = 60 Hz
126 Display brightness 1 Std_u8 Edit 0% 100% 1% 75% HF HF
127 Timeout for menu operation 1 Std_u8 Edit 10 min 120 min 1 min 30 min OEM OEM
128 Fuel meter: Pulse valency [pulses / volume unit] 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 400 0,01 0 HF HF
129 Fuel meter 1: Pulse valency [pulse / unit of volume] 1 Std_u16 Edit 0 400 0,01 0 HF HF
130 Delete display of error history 1 Std_s8 Edit -5 2 1 0 HF HF
To delete the display: Set parameter to 1, then to 2
Return value 0: Job successfully completed
Return value -1: Timeout of 1_2 sequence
133 Default output at TÜV test 1 Output Edit / 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF
Invalid = TÜV test at active output erasable
20...100 = low-fire…high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
134 Fuel 1: Default output at TÜV test 1 Output Edit / 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF
Invalid = TÜV test at active output erasable
20...100 = low-fire…high-fire or stage 1 / stage 2 / stage 3
141 Operating mode building automation system 1 Selection Edit 0 2 1 0 HF HF
0 = off
1 = Modbus
2 = reserved
142 Setback time in the event of communication breakdown 1 Std_u16 Edit 0s 7200 s 1s 120 s HF HF (GA)
(GA)
Setting value:
0 = deactivated
1…7200 s
143 Reserved 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 8 1 1 IS IS
144 Reserved 1 Std_u16 Edit 10 s 60 s 1s 30 s HF HF
145 Device address for Modbus of LMV26 / LMV36 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 247 1 1 HF HF
Setting value:
236/283

1…247
146 Setting of Baud rate for Modbus communication 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = 9600
1 = 19200
147 Setting of parity for Modbus communication 1 Selection Edit 0 2 1 0 HF HF
0 = none
1 = odd
2 = even
148 Default output if communication with building automation is 1 Output Edit/ 0% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
interrupted erasable (GA)
Setting values
For modulation operation the setting range is as follows:
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating (20 = low-fire position)
For multistage operation apply to setting range:

0 = burner OFF

149 Fuel 1: Default output if communication with building automation 1 Output Edit/ 0% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
is interrupted erasable (GA)
Setting values
For modulation operation the setting range is as follows:
20…100 = 20…100% burner rating (20 = low-fire position)
For multistage operation apply to setting range:

0 = burner OFF

161 Number of faults 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 65535 1 0 --- IS
162 Operating hours resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h IS IS
163 Operating hours when LMV26 / LMV36 is live 1 Std_s32 Read only 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h --- IS
164 Number of startups resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 9999999 1 0 IS IS
237/283

165 Fuel 0: Number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 --- IS
166 Total number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 --- IS
167 Fuel volume resettable [m³, l, ft³, gal] 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 99999999 1 0 IS IS
172 Fuel 1: Operation hours resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0h 9999999 h 1h 0h IS IS
174 Fuel 1: Number of startups resettable 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 9999999 1 0 IS IS
175 Fuel 1: Number of startups 1 Std_s32 Read only 0 9999999 1 0 --- IS
177 Fuel 1: Fuel volume resettable (m³, l, ft³, gal) 1 Std_s32 Reset 0 99999999 1 0 IS IS
186 Software drop out delay time of flame signal (100 ms) 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 20 1 0; 0 OEM OEM
Index 0 = QRB / QRC (0 = deactivated, >1 = activated)
Index 1 = ION / QRA (0 = deactivated, >3 = activated) (only 200
ms-steps)
187 Fuel 1: Software drop out delay time of flame signal (100 ms) 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 20 1 0; 0 OEM OEM
Index 0 = QRB / QRC (0 = deactivated, >1 = activated)
Index 1 = ION / QRA (0 = deactivated, >3 = activated) (only 200
ms-steps)
190 Postpurging in lockout position 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF HF
0 = deactivate (no-load position)
1 = active (postpurge position)
When active, the Alarm in the event of start prevention function

is only possible to a limited extent!
194 Repetition limit no flame at the end of safety time 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 4 1 1 OEM OEM
1 = no repetition
Recharging time:
196 Repetition limit air pressure failure 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 1 OEM OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
3 = 2 repetitions
Recharging time:
197 Flame signal sensitivity setting ionization probe / QRA in 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 0 OEM HF
operation ( phase 60)
0 = standard
1 = sensitivity approx. twice as high
238/283

198 Maximum output for high flame sensitivity 1 Std_u8 Edit 2 9 1 4 OEM HF
2 = no maximum output
3...9 = P3...P9
199 Repetition limit value actuators 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 3 1 3 OEM OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
3 = 2 repetitions

201 Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / multistage, 1 Selection Edit/ 1 29 1 undefined HF HF (GA)
actuators, etc.) erasable (GA)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
25 = Ho mod. without circulation control ¹)
239/283

¹) Selected operating mode is not released for the LMV26 /

LMV36. With select: Error code 210 diagnostic code 0
204 Behavior if analog input is invalid (4…20 mA) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 1 HF HF
0 = deactivate default output low-fire / trim function (with warning
message)
1 = safety shutdown + startup prevention
2 = deactivate default output low-fire / trim function (without
warning message)
205 Function Load controller contacts multistage 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM OEM
0 = standard
1 = stages interchanged
208 Program stop 1 Selection Edit 0 4 1 0 HF HF (GA)
0 = deactivated (GA)
2 = ignition position (phase 36)
210 Alarm in the event of start prevention 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF HF
0 = deactivated
1 = activated
211 Fan ramp up time 1 Time Edit 2s 60 s 0,2 s 2s HF HF
212 Maximum time down to low-fire 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 min 0,2 s 45 s HF HF
213 Waiting time home run 1 Time Edit 2s 60 s 0,2 s 2s OEM OEM
214 Maximum time start release 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 min 0,2 s 25 s OEM OEM
215 Repetition limit safety loop 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 16 HF HF
1 = no repetition
Recharging time:
Every 24 hours
217 Maximum waiting time for detection of detector or pressure 1 Time Edit 5s 10 min 0,2 s 30 s OEM OEM
switch signal (e.g. home run, preignition)
221 Gas: Active detector flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
240/283

0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
222 Gas: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = inactive
1 = active
223 Repetition limit gas pressure switch-min 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 16 HF HF
1 = no repetition
Recharging time:
 Note!
Parameters 223 and 323 refer to the same value.
This means that no separate setting is possible for
oil / gas or fuel 0 / fuel 1.
225 Gas: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 20 s 60 min 0,2 s 20 s HF HF
226 Gas: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s LMV26.300A2: 2 s HF HF
LMV36.300A2: 3 s
227 Gas: First safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
229 Gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within first and second 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 9,6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM OEM
safety time
230 Gas: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s HF HF
231 Gas: Second safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
232 Gas: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s HF HF
233 Gas: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 8s HF HF
234 Gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 108 min 0,2 s 0,2 s HF HF
235 Gas: Air pressure switch 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 OEM HF
1 = active
2 = active, except phase 60...66 / 70...72 (pneumatic operation
only)
236 Gas: Input pressure switch-min 1 Selection Edit 1 3 1 2 HF HF
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel valve
V1 and fuel valve V2)
237 Gas: Input pressure switch-max / POC 1 Selection Edit 1 4 1 1 HF HF
241/283

2 = POC
239 Only LMV36.300A2: 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM HF
Gas. Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
240 Repetition limit loss of flame 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 2 OEM OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
Recharging time:

Note!
241 Gas: Execution valve proving 1 Selection Edit 0 3 1 2 HF HF
1 = valve proving on startup
242 Gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
243 Gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
244 Gas: Valve proving - test space filling 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
245 Gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
246 Gas: Waiting time gas shortage 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
248 Gas: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller On) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0,2 s 1s HF HF
249 Gas: Prepurge time (OEM) 1 Time Edit 5s 60 min 0,2 s 20 s HF OEM
261 Oil: Active detector of flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
262 Oil: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM OEM
0 = inactive
1 = active
265 Oil: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 15 s 60 min 0,2 s 15 s HF HF
242/283

266 Oil: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0,6 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
267 Oil: First safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 5s OEM OEM
269 Oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within first and second 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 14,6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM OEM
safety time
270 Oil: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
271 Oil: Second safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 5s OEM OEM
272 Oil: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
273 Oil: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 8s HF HF
274 Oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 108 min 0,2 s 0,2 s HF HF
276 Oil: Input pressure switch-min 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 HF HF
1 = active from phase 38
277 Oil: Input pressure switch-max/POC 1 Selection Edit 1 4 1 1 HF HF
2 = POC
3 = not used
279 Only LMV36.300A2: 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF OEM
Oil: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
280 Repetition limit value loss of flame 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 2 1 2 OEM OEM
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
Recharging time:

Note!
281 Oil: Point in time oil is ignited 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF HF
0 = short preignition (phase 38)
284 Oil: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller ON) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0,2 s 1s HF HF
288 Oil: Prepurge time (OEM) 1 Time Edit 5s 60 min 0,2 s 15 s HF OEM
243/283

301 Fuel 1: Burner operating mode (fuel train, modulating / 1 Selection Edit/ 1 29 1 undefined HF HF (GA)
multistage, actuators, etc.) erasable (GA)
1 = G mod
2 = Gp1 mod
3 = Gp2 mod
4 = Lo mod
5 = Lo 2-stage
6 = Lo 3-stage
7 = G mod pneu
8 = Gp1 mod pneu
9 = Gp2 mod pneu
10 = LoGp mod
11 = LoGp 2-stage
25 = Ho mod. without circulation control ¹)
¹) Selected operating mode is not released for the LMV26 /

LMV36:
321 Fuel 1 gas: Active detector of flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
244/283

0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
322 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = inactive
1 = active
323 Repetition limit value gas pressure switch-min 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 16 1 16 HF HF
1 = no repetition
Recharging time:

Note!
325 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 20 s 60 min 0,2 s 20 s HF HF
326 Fuel 1 gas: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
327 Fuel 1 gas: First safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
329 Fuel 1 gas: Time to respond to pressure faults within first and 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 9,6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM OEM
second safety time
330 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s HF HF
331 Fuel 1 gas: Second safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
332 Fuel 1 gas: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 s 0,2 s 2s HF HF
333 Fuel 1 gas: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 8s HF HF
334 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 108 min 0,2 s 0,2 s HF HF
335 Fuel 1 gas: Air pressure switch 1 Selection Edit 1 2 1 1 HF OEM
1 = active
2 = active, except phase 60...66 / 70...72 (pneumatic operation
only)
336 Fuel 1 gas: Input pressure switch-min 1 Selection Edit 1 3 1 2 HF HF
2 = valve proving via pressure switch-min (between fuel valve
V1 and fuel valve V2)
337 Fuel 1 gas: Input pressure switch-max / POC 1 Selection Edit 1 4 1 1 HF HF
245/283

2 = POC
3 = valve proving pressure switch
Fuel 1 gas. Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
Recharging time:

Note!
341 Fuel 1 gas: Execution valve proving 1 Selection Edit 0 3 1 2 HF HF
1 = valve proving on startup
342 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space evacuating 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
343 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time atmospheric pressure 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
344 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test space filling 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 10 s 0,2 s 3s OEM OEM
345 Fuel 1 gas: Valve proving - test time gas pressure 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
346 Fuel 1 gas: Waiting time gas shortage 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 10 s OEM OEM
348 Fuel 1 gas: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller ON) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0,2 s 1s HF HF
349 Fuel 1 gas: Prepurge time (OEM) 1 Time Edit 5s 60 min 0,2 s 20 s HF OEM
361 Fuel 1 oil: Active detector of flame evaluation 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = QRB / QRC
1 = ION / QRA
362 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurging 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 1 OEM OEM
0 = inactive
1 = active
365 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurge time 1 Time Edit 15 s 60 min 0,2 s 15 s HF HF
366 Fuel 1 oil: Preignition time 1 Time Edit 0,6 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
246/283

367 Fuel 1 oil: First safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 5s OEM OEM
369 Fuel 1 oil: Time to respond to pressure faults within first and 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 14,6 s 0,2 s 1,8 s OEM OEM
second safety time
370 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 1 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
371 Fuel 1 oil: Second safety time 1 Time Edit 1s 15 s 0,2 s 5s OEM OEM
372 Fuel 1 oil: Interval 2 1 Time Edit 0,4 s 60 min 0,2 s 2s HF HF
373 Fuel 1 oil: Afterburn time 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 60 s 0,2 s 8s HF HF
374 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (no extraneous light test) 1 Time Edit 0,2 s 108 min 0,2 s 0,2 s HF HF
377 Fuel 1 oil: Input pressure switch-max / POC 1 Selection Edit 1 4 1 1 HF HF
2 = POC
3 = not used
Fuel 1 oil: Forced intermittent operation
0 = inactive
1 = active
1 = no repetition
2 = 1 repetition
Recharging time:

Note!
381 Fuel 1 oil: Point in time oil is ignited 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF HF
0 = short preignition (phase 38)
384 Fuel 1 oil: Postpurge time (abortion if load controller ON) 1 Time Edit 1s 108 min 0,2 s 1s HF HF
388 Fuel 1 oil: Prepurge time (OEM) 1 Time Edit 5s 60 min 0,2 s 15 s HF OEM
400 Ratio curves

401 Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°; 0°; 15°; undefined HF HF
402 Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°; 90°; 45°; undefined HF HF
403 Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 15% 100% 0,1% 0%; 100%; 50%; HF HF
247/283

undefined
404 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves fuel actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°, 0°, 15°, undefined HF HF
405 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves air actuator (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°, 90°, 45°, undefined HF HF
406 Fuel 1: Ratio control curves VSD (curve setting only) 13 Std_s16 Edit 15% 100% 0,1% 0%, 100%, 50%, HF HF
undefined
500 Ratio control

501 No-flame positions fuel actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° Index Value HF HF
Index 0 = home position 0 0°
Index 1 = prepurge position 1 0°
Index 2 = postpurge position 2 15°
502 No-flame positions air actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° Index Value HF HF
Index 0 = home position 0 0°
Index 1 = prepurge position 1 90°
Index 2 = postpurge position 2 45°
503 No-flame speeds VSD 3 Std_s16 Edit 0% 100% 0,1% Index Value HF HF
Index 0 = no-load speed 0 0%
Index 1 = prepurge speed 1 100%
Index 2 = postpurge speed 2 50%
504 Fuel 1: No-flame position fuel actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°, 0°, 15° HF HF
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
505 Fuel 1: No-flame position air actuator 3 Std_s16 Edit 0° 90° 0,1° 0°, 90°, 45° HF HF
Index 0 = home position
Index 1 = prepurge position
Index 2 = postpurge position
506 Fuel 1: No-flame speed VSD 3 Std_s16 Edit 0% 100% 0,1% 0%, 100%, 50% HF HF
Index 0 = no-load speed
Index 1 = prepurge speed
Index 2 = postpurge speed
522 Ramp up 1 Std_u8 Edit 5s 40 s 1s 10 s HF HF
523 Ramp down 1 Std_u8 Edit 5s 40 s 1s 10 s HF HF
529 Separate movement of the PWM fan (ignition speed / postpurge 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 HF OEM
speed)
0 = inactive
1 = active
2 = active (50% tolerance increase outside operation)
248/283

530 Activation trim function 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 4 1 0 HF OEM
0 = inactive
1 = active
2 = active (including test function for analog input)
3 = active (including ignition speed)
4 = active (including ignition speed and analog input test)
542 Activation of VSD / PWM fan 1 Selection Edit 0 2 1 0 HF HF
0 = deactivated
1 = activated
544 Ramp modulating 1 Std_u8 Edit 32 s 80 s 1s 32 s HF HF
545 Lower output limit 1 Output Edit 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
undefined = 20% (GA)
546 Upper output limit 1 Output Edit 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
547 Lower trim limit 1 Std_s16 Edit -15% 0% 0,1% -4% HF OEM
(GA)
548 Upper trim limit 1 Std_s16 Edit 0% 25% 0,1% 4% HF OEM
(GA)
549 Trim damping (based on low-fire) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0% 100% 1% 88% HF OEM
550 Trim delay time (after entering phase 60) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0s 255 s 1s 25 s HF OEM
551 Wait time until warning with active trim limit 1 Time Edit 0s 60 min 0,2 s 0s HF OEM
552 Behavior if maximum trim limitation time is exceeded 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 HF OEM
0 = Warning message only (trim impact remains active)
1 = Warning and deactivation of the trim function
2 = Shutdown
565 Fuel 1: Lower output limit 1 Output Edit 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
566 Fuel 1: Upper output limit 1 Output Edit 20% 100% 0,1% undefined HF HF (GA)
567 Lower trim limit 1 Std_s16 Edit -15% 0% 0,1% -4% HF OEM
(GA)
568 Upper trim limit 1 Std_s16 Edit 0% 25% 0,1% 4% HF OEM
(GA)
569 Trim damping (based on low-fire) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0% 100% 1% 88% HF OEM
570 Trim delay time (after entering phase 60) 1 Std_u8 Edit 0s 255 s 1s 25 s HF OEM
571 Wait time until warning with active trim limit 1 Time Edit 0s 60 min 0,2 s 0s HF OEM
572 Behavior if maximum trim limitation time is exceeded 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 HF OEM
249/283

0 = Warning message only (trim impact remains active)
1 = Warning and deactivation of the trim function
2 = Shutdown
600 Actuators
601 Selection of reference point 2 Selection Edit 0 1 1 Index Value HF OEM
Index 0 = fuel 0 1
Index 1 = air 1 0
Setting values:
0 = CLOSED (<0°)
1 = OPEN (>90°)
602 Actuator's direction of rotation 2 Selection Edit 0 1 1 Index Value HF OEM
Index 0 = fuel 0 0
Index 1 = air 1 0
Setting values:
606 Tolerance limit of position monitoring [0.1°] 2 Std_u8 Edit 0,5° 4° 0,1° Index Value HF OEM
Index 0 = fuel 0 1,7°
Index 1 = air 1 1,7°
Greatest position error where a fault is securely detected

 error detection band: (parameter 606-0.6°) to parameter 606
608 Fuel 1: Selection of reference point for fuel actuator 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 HF OEM
0 = CLOSED (<0°)
1 = OPEN (>90°)
609 Fuel 1: Actuator's direction of rotation 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 0 HF OEM
610 Fuel 1: Tolerance limit of position monitoring for fuel actuator 1 Std_u8 Edit 0° 4° 0,1° 1,7° HF OEM
(0.1°)

 Error detection band: (parameter 606 -0.6°) up to parameter
606
611 Type of reference 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 3 1 Index Value HF OEM
250/283

Index 0 = fuel 0 0
Index 1 = air 1 0
Setting values:
0 = standard
3 = both
612 Fuel 1: Type of reference for fuel actuator 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 3 1 0 HF OEM
0 = standard
3 = both
613 Type of actuator 2 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0; 0 HF OEM
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
Setting values:
0 = 5 s / 90° (1 Nm, 1,2 Nm, 3 Nm)
1 = 10 s / 90° (6 Nm)
2 = 17 s / 90° (10 Nm)
614 Fuel 1: Actuator type of the fuel 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 HF OEM
0 = 5 s / 90° (1 Nm, 1,2 Nm, 3 Nm)
1 = 10 s / 90° (6 Nm)
2 = 17 s / 90° (10 Nm)
641 Activation of the speed standardization of VSD 1 Std_s8 Edit -25 1 1 0 HF HF
Error diagnostics of negative values (refer to error code 82)
642 Standardized speed 4 Std_u16 Read only 650 14000 1 undefined --- HF
Index 0 = speed 1
Fuel 1:
Index 2 = speed 3
643 Setting the speed signal 1 Selection Edit 0 1 1 0 HF OEM
0 = asymmetrical
251/283

1 = symmetrical
644 Setting pulses per revolution 1 Std_u8 Edit 1 6 1 3 HF OEM
645 Configuration of analog output 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 2 1 0 HF HF
0 = DC 0...10 V
1 = DC 2...10 V
2 = DC 0/2...10 V
647 No-load time for speed measurement in modulating operation 1 Std_u8 Edit 4 8 1 8 HF OEM
[25 ms]
652 VSD behavior when safety loop / burner flange is open 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = no VSD control when safety loop / burner flange is open
1 = VSD control independent of safety loop / burner flange
653 VSD standstill supervision in standby mode 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 HF HF
0 = deactivate
1 = active
661 Internal speed control of LMV26 / LMV36 1 Std_u8 Edit 0 1 1 1 HF OEM
0 = deactivated (controlled PWM fan)
1 = activated (VSD)
662 Speed supervision neutral zone 1 Std_u8 Edit 0,5% 3,5% 0,1% 0,5% HF OEM
663 Speed supervision low deviation zone 1 Std_u8 Edit 2% 5,5% 0,1% 2% HF OEM
664 Speed supervision: Maximum time outside low deviation zone 1 Time Edit 8s 16 s 0,2 s 8s HF OEM
665 Speed supervision: Maximum time outside medium deviation 1 Time Edit 3s 7s 0,2 s 3s HF OEM
zone
667 Minimum prepurge speed 1 Std_s16 Edit / 40% 100% 0,1% undefined HF OEM
erasable
668 Maximum ignition speed 1 Std_s16 Edit / 20% 75% 0,1% undefined HF OEM
erasable
669 Minimum / maximum speed limitation in operation 2 Std_s16 Edit / 10% 100% 0,1% undefined HF OEM
Index 0 = minimum speed erasable
670 Speed air pressure switch OFF 1 Std_s16 Edit 20% 90% 0,1% 50% HF OEM
671 Speed air pressure switch ON 1 Std_s16 Edit 45% 100% 0,1% 80% HF OEM
700 Error history

701 Current error state
701.01 Error code 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
701.02 Diagnostic code 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
701.03 Error class 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 6 1 0 --- IS
252/283

701.04 Error phase 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
701.05 Startup counter 25 Std_s32 Read only 0 99999999 1 0 --- IS
701.06 Output 25 Output Read only 0% 100% 0,1% 0% --- IS
701.07 Fuel 25 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
702 Latest error in the history
725 Oldest error in the history
900 Process data

903 Current output 2 Output Read only 0% 100% 0,1% 0% --- IS
Index 0 = fuel For query
Index 1 = air via
ACS410
916 Input value analog input 1 Std_s16 Read only -20% 30% 0,1% 0% --- HF (GA)
4 mA = 15%
10 mA = 0%
20 mA = 25%
917 Target value trim function (with limitation and damping) 1 Std_s16 Read only -17,5% 27,5% 0,1% 0% --- HF
918 Current trim correction 1 Std_s16 Read only -17,5% 27,5% 0,1% 0% --- HF (GA)
922 Incremental position of actuators 2 Std_s16 Read only -50° 150° 0,1° 0° --- IS
Index 0 = fuel
Index 1 = air
932 Speed specification of the frequency converter / fan 1 Std_s16 Read only 0% 3276,7% 0,1% 0% --- HF
933 Offset from the VSD speed control 1 Std_s16 Read only -10% 15% 0,1% 0% --- HF
935 Absolute speed 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 65535 1 0 --- HF (GA)
936 Standardized speed 1 Std_s16 Read only -200% 200% 0,1% 0% --- IS
942 Active load controller source 1 Selection Read only 0 255 1 0 --- HF
1 = output during curve settings
2 = manual output
3 = default output via building automation
4 = default output via analog input
5 = external load controller via contacts
945 Actual fuel 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
0 = fuel 0
1 = fuel 1
947 Results of contact release (bit-coded) 2 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
Bit 0.0 = 1: pressure switch-min For query
Bit 0.1 = 2: pressure switch-max via
253/283

Bit 0.2 = 4: internal fuel selection 0 ACS410
Bit 0.3 = 8: air pressure switch
Bit 0.4 = 16: load controller OPEN
Bit 0.5 = 32: load controller ON
Bit 0.6 = 64: load controller CLOSE
Bit 0.7 = 128: safety loop
Bit 1.0 = 1: safety valve
Bit 1.1 = 2: ignition transformer
Bit 1.2 = 4: fuel valve V1
Bit 1.3 = 8: fuel valve V2
Bit 1.4 = 16: fuel valve V3 / pilot valve
Bit 1.5 = 32: internal fuel selection 1
948 Contact feedback network counter register 14 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- HF
950 Required relay state (bit-coded) 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
Bit 0 = 1: Alarm For query
Bit 1 = 2: Safety valve via
Bit 2 = 4: Ignition transformer ACS410
Bit 3 = 8: Fuel valve V1
Bit 4 = 16: Fuel valve V2
Bit 5 = 32: Fuel valve V3 / pilot valve
951 Mains voltage (normalized) 1 Std_u8 Read only 0V 255 V 1V 0V --- HF (GA)
AC 230 V: Voltage = value x 1.710
AC 120 V: Voltage = value x 0.866
954 Intensity of flame 1 Std_u8 Read only 0% 100% 1% 0% --- IS
960 Actual flow rate (m³/h, l/h, ft³/h, gal/h) 1 Std_u16 Read only 0 6553,5 0,1 0 --- IS
961 Phase (state for external module and display) 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
For query
via
ACS410
981 Error memory: Code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
For query
via
ACS410
982 Error memory: Diagnostic code 1 Std_u8 Read only 0 255 1 0 --- IS
For query
via
ACS410
992 Error flags 10 Hex_32 Reset 0 0xFFFFFF 1 0 HF HF
254/283

FF
Std_u8 8 bit integer, not signed

Std_s8 8 bit integer, signed
 Note
This data type is also used to mark an invalid or signed values by using the value «-1».
Std_s16 16 Bit integer, signed
 Note
Std_s32 32 Bit integer, signed
 Note
255/283

30 Error code list (all LMV2 types / LMV3 types)
Error
Diagnostic code Meaning for the LMV26 / LMV36 Recommended measures or causes
code
No communication between LMV26 / LMV36 basic unit
no Comm Check wiring for line interruption/loose contact
and AZL2
2 # No flame at the end of first safety time
1 No flame at the end of first safety time
2 No flame at the end of second safety time
No flame at the end of first safety time (software version 
4
V02.00)
3 # Air pressure failure
0 Air pressure off
1 Air pressure on
Correct the setting of parameter 235 or 335
2 Evaluation of air pressure
(Deactivation of the air pressure check in operation only allowed in pneumatic operation!)
4 Air pressure on – prevention of startup
20 Air pressure, combustion pressure – start prevention
68 Air pressure, POC – start prevention
84 Air pressure, combustion pressure, POC – start prevention
4 # Extraneous light
0 Extraneous light during startup
1 Extraneous light during shutdown
2 Extraneous light during startup – prevention of startup
6 Extraneous light during startup, air pressure – start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, combustion pressure – start
18
prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, combustion
24
pressure – start prevention
66 Extraneous light during startup, POC – start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, POC – start
70
prevention
Extraneous light during startup, combustion pressure, POC –
82
start prevention
Extraneous light during startup, air pressure, combustion
86
pressure, POC – start prevention
7 # Loss of flame
0 Loss of flame
256/283

30 Error code list (all LMV2 types / LMV3 types) 17.12.2018
Error
code
3 Loss of flame (software version  V02.00)
Diagnostics corresponds to the period of time from shutdown of fuel valves to the detection of loss
3...255 Loss of flame due to TÜV test (loss-of-flame test)
of flame (increment 0.2 s  Value 5 = 1 s)
12 # Valve proving
For valve proving via X5-01 (gas pressure switch-min)
Fuel valve V1 leaking - Check to see if the valve on the burner side is leaking
0
(fuel valve V2 with valve proving via X5-01) - Check to see if the pressure switch for the valve proving is closed when gas pressure is present
- Check wiring to see if there is a short-circuit
For valve proving via X5-01 (gas pressure switch-min)
Fuel valve V2 leaking
1 - Check to see if the valve on the gas side is leaking
(fuel valve V1 with valve proving via X5-01)
- Check wiring to see if there is a short-circuit
Valve proving activated, but pressure switch-min selected as input function for X9-04 (check
2 Valve proving not possible
parameters 238 and 241)
3 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but no input assigned (check parameters 236 and 237)
4 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but 2 inputs assigned (set parameter 237 to pressure switch-max or POC)
5 Valve proving not possible Valve proving activated, but 2 inputs assigned (check parameters 236 and 237)
Check to see if the valve on the gas side is leaking
81 V1 leaking
Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit
Check to see if the valve on the burner side is leaking
Check to see if the pressure switch for the leakage test is closed when gas pressure is present
83 V2 leaking Check wiring for short-circuit
Check whether the gas pressure is present if the gas pressure switch-min was mounted after
the fuel valves.
14 # POC
0 POC open Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed
Check wiring
1 POC closed
Check to see if the valve’s closing contact opens when valve is controlled
Check wiring to see if there is a line interruption.
64 POC open – prevention of startup
Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed
18 # Air pressure fault (speed-dependent air pressure switch)
Check the setting for parameter 671.
0 Air pressure off
Air pressure switch (X5-02) must report an ON signal above the configured ON threshold.
Check the setting for parameter 670.
1 Air pressure on
Air pressure switch (X5-02) must report an OFF signal below the configured OFF threshold.
128 Invalid parameterization Check the setting of the speed thresholds (parameter 671 > 670).
Check to see if pressure switch has closed with no combustion pressure present
19 80 Combustion pressure, POC – start prevention
Check wiring for short-circuit
257/283

Error
code
20 # Pressure switch-min
0 No minimum gas / oil pressure Check wiring for line interruption
1 Gas shortage / prevention of startup Check wiring for line interruption
21 # Pressure switch-max / POC
Pressure switch-max: Max. gas / oil pressure exceeded Check wiring to see if there is a line interruption.
0
POC: POC open (software version  V02.00) POC: Check to see if the valve’s closing contact is closed
Check wiring.
1 POC closed (software version  V02.00)
Check if the valve closure contact opens when valve is controlled.
Check wiring.
64 POC open –prevention of startup (software version  V02.00)
Check if the valve closure contact opens when valve is controlled.
22 OFF S # Safety loop / burner flange
0 Safety loop / burner flange open
1 Safety loop / burner flange open / prevention of startup
3 Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light – start prevention
5 Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, combustion pressure – start
17
prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, combustion
19
pressure – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, combustion pressure –
21
start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure,
23
combustion pressure – start prevention
65 Safety loop/burner flange, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, POC – start
67
prevention
69 Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure, POC
71
– start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, combustion pressure, POC – start
81
prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, combustion
83
pressure, POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, air pressure, combustion pressure,
85
POC – start prevention
Safety loop/burner flange, extraneous light, air pressure,
87
combustion pressure, POC – start prevention
23 # Gas pressure switch-min / heavy oil direct start
258/283

Error
code
0 No minimum gas pressure Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit (X5-01)
1 Gas shortage – start prevention Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit (X5-01)
Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit (X9-04)
2 Heavy oil direct start
Check that the oil is preheated correctly
50 # Internal error Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
60 # Internal error: No valid load controller source
0 Internal fault: No valid load controller source Reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36.
1. Check wiring of analog predefined output to see if there is an open-circuit / loose contact.
1 Analog output preset valid – prevention of startup 2. When the trim function is activated (parameter 530), the default output must not be on invalid if
the Modbus communication (parameter 148 / 149) is interrupted.
1. Check wiring of analog predefined output to see if there is an open-circuit / loose contact.
2. When the trim function is activated (parameter 530), the default output must not be on invalid if
the Modbus communication (parameter 148 / 149) is interrupted.
2 Analog output preset valid – default output low-fire
Note!
 This information is provided in connection with the thermal shock protection
function (manual interruption of 4...20 mA analog input)
61 Fuel Chg # Fuel changeover
Fuel Chg 0 Fuel 0 No error - change to Fuel 0
Fuel Chg 1 Fuel 1 No error - change to Fuel 1
62 Fuel Err # Invalid fuel signals / fuel information
Check wiring to see if there is an open-circuit
Fuel Err 0 Invalid fuel selection (Fuel 0 + 1 = 0)
 Note
Curves cannot be set
Fuel Err 1 Different fuel selection between the µCs Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Fuel Err 2 Different fuel signals between the µCs Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Check wiring for short-circuit
Note
Fuel Err 3 Invalid fuel selection (Fuel 0 + 1 = 1)
 Curves cannot be set.
Optional press reset button >3 seconds.
259/283

Error
code
Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Position calculation
70 #
modulating
23 Output invalid No valid output
26 Curvepoints undefined Adjust the curvepoints for all actuators
71 # Special position undefined
0 Home position Parameterize the home position for all actuators used
1 Prepurge position Parameterize the prepurge position for all actuators used
2 Postpurge position Parameterize the postpurge position for all actuators used
3 Ignition position Parameterize the ignition position for all actuators used
72 # Internal error fuel-air ratio control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Position calculation
73 #
multistep
23 Output invalid No valid output
26 Curvepoints undefined Adjust the curvepoints for all actuators
75 # Internal error fuel-air ratio control: Data clocking check
Check the external load controller, including the connection.
1 Current output different
Parameters 123.1 and 123.2 must be identical (example: set to 1).
2 Target output different
4 Target positions different
6 Target output and target position different
Can be caused by different standardized speeds (e.g. after restore of data set) when the VSD is
16 Different positions reached
activated  standardize again and check adjustment of the fuel-air ratio control system
76 # Internal error fuel-air control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
LMV26 / LMV36 could not correct the difference in speed and reached a control range limit.
1. LMV26 / LMV36 is not standardized for this motor  repeat standardization.
Caution!
Settings of fuel-air ratio control must be checked!
80 # Control range limitation of VSD 2. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameters
522, 523) or the setting for the modulating operating ramp is incorrect (parameter 544)
3. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration of the voltage input at the VSD must
accord with that of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameter 645).
4. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of the LMV26 / LMV36. Check settings of the
VSD (input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different speeds)
260/283

Error
code
1 Control range limitation at the bottom VSD speed was too high
2 Control range limitation at the top VSD speed was too low
Too much electromagnetic interference on the sensor line
81 1 Interrupt limitation speed input
 improve EMC
82 # Error during VSD’s speed standardization
Timeout at the end of standardization during ramp down of the VSD
1 Timeout of standardization (VSD ramp down time too long)  Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameter:
523)
Error during storage of the standardized speed
2 Storage of standardized speed not successful
 lock the LMV26 / LMV36, then reset it and repeat the standardization
LMV26 / LMV36 receives no pulses from the speed sensor:
1. Motor does not turn.
3 Line interruption speed sensor
2. Speed sensor is not connected.
3. Speed sensor is not activated by the sensor disk (check distance)
Motor has not reached a stable speed after ramp up.
1. Ramp time settings of the VSD are not shorter than those of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameters
522, 523).
Speed variation / VSD ramp up time too long / speed below 2. Characteristic of the VSD is not linear. Configuration of the voltage input at the VSD must
4
minimum limit for standardization accord with that of the LMV26 / LMV36 (parameter 645).
3. VSD does not follow quickly enough the changes of the LMV26 / LMV36. Check settings of the
VSD (input filter, slippage compensation, hiding different speeds)
4. Speed of VSD lies below the minimum for standardization (650 1/min)
Motor’s direction of rotation is wrong.
1. Motor turns indeed in the wrong direction
5 Wrong direction of rotation  change parameterization of the direction of rotation or interchange 2 live conductors.
2. Sensor disk is fitted the wrong way
 turn the sensor disk.
The required pulse pattern (60°, 120°, 180°) has not been correctly identified.
1. Speed sensor does not detect all tappets of the sensor disk
 check distance
2. As the motor turns, other metal parts are detected also, in addition to the tappets  improve
6 Unplausible sensor signals
mounting.
3. Electromagnetic interference on the sensor lines
 check cable routing, improve EMC
4. Checking the settings for parameters 643 (symmetry) and 644 (number of pulses per revolution)
The standardized speed measured does not lie in the permissible range.
7 Invalid standardized speed
 Motor turns too slowly or too fast.
15 Speed deviation µC1 + µC2 The speeds of microcomputer 1 and 2 deviated too much. This can be caused by wrong
261/283

Error
code
standardized speeds (e.g. after restoring a data set to a new LMV26 / LMV36)
→ repeat standardization and check the fuel-air ratio
Standardization was made in a wrong phase. Permitted are only phases 12
20 Wrong phase of phase manager
 load controller OFF, start standardization again
21 Safety loop / burner flange open Safety loop or burner flange is open  repeat standardization with safety loop closed
Air actuator has not been referenced or has lost its referencing.
1. Check if the reference position can be approached.
22 Air actuator not referenced 2. Check if actuators have been mixed up.
3. If error only occurs after the start of standardization, the actuator might be overloaded and
cannot reach its destination.
Standardization was started with VSD deactivated
23 VSD deactivated
 activate the VSD and repeat standardization
Standardization was started without valid operation mode
24 No valid operation mode
 activate valid operation mode and repeat standardization
Standardization was started with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
25 Pneumatic air-fuel ratio control  standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control not possible
Attention!
If speed supervision is required in the pneumatic ratio control, the relevant
parameters must be set (parameters 667 / 668 / 669) before standardization.
VSD is controlled but not standardized
128 Running command with no preceding standardization
Motor turns but is not standardized
255 No standardized speed available
83 # Speed error VSD Required speed has not been reached
Increase parameter 662 (neutral zone in speed supervision) and parameter 663 (close range in
0 Speed error when trim function is active
speed supervision)
Bit 0 Speed has not been reached because control range limitation has become active
Lower control range limitation of control
Valency 1  for measures, refer to error code 80
Bit 1 Speed has not been reached because control range limitation has become active
Upper control range limitation of control
Valency 2...3  for measures, refer to error code 80
Bit 2 Speed has not been reached due to too much electromagnetic interference on the sensor line
Interruption via disturbance pulses
Valency 4...7  for measures, refer to error code 81
Check speed differential between the curvepoints and the modulating operating ramp setting
(parameter 544).
Bit 3
Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed 1. Modulating operating ramp 32 seconds
Valency  8
Curve slope max. 10% for LMV26 / LMV36 ramp of 20 seconds (20% for 10 seconds or 40% for 5
seconds)
262/283

Error
code
2. Modulating operating ramp 48 seconds
seconds)
Curve slope max. 10% for LMV26 / LMV36 ramp of 40 seconds (20% for 20 seconds or 40% for
10 seconds)
→ Between the ignition point (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), the speed change in modulating
mode may be a maximum of 40%, independent of the LMV26 / LMV36 ramp.
4. The setting of the VSD ramp must be about 20% faster than the ramps in the LMV26 / LMV36
(parameters 522, 523).
No speed detected in spite of control.
Bit 4 1. Check if the motor turns.
Interruption of speed signal
Valency  16 2. Check if the speed sensor delivers a signal (LED / check distance from the sensor disk).
3. Check wiring of the VSD.
Speed deviation was for about 1 s >10% outside the anticipated range.
Bit 5
Quick shutdown due to excessive speed deviation 1. Check ramp times of the LMV26 / LMV36 and VSD.
Valency  32
2. Check wiring of the VSD.
1. Standby (phase 12): Check the setting for the minimum speed and maximum speed during
operation (parameter 669.0 / 669.1; MAX > MIN).
2. Check the speed recording (absolute speed parameter 935, standardized speed parameter 936).
Bit 6
Minimum speed fall below (phase-dependent) 3. Prepurge phase (phase 30): Read-in speed or prepurge speed (parameter 503.1 / 506.1) below
Valency 64
the minimum speed for prepurging (parameter 667).
4. Operating phases (phase 40...64): Read-in speed or setting of the speed curve below the
minimum speed in operation (parameter 669.0).
1. Standby (phase 12): Setting preignition time (parameter gas 226 / 336 or oil 266 / 366) at least 3
seconds (or  parameter 665)
2. Standby (phase 12): Check the setting for the minimum speed and maximum speed during
operation (parameter 669.0 / 669.1; MAX > MIN).
Bit 7
Maximum speed exceeded (phase-dependent) 3. Check the speed recording (absolute speed parameter 935, standardized speed parameter 936).
Valency 128
4. Preignition time (phase 38): Read-in speed or setting of the ignition speed (P0) above the
maximum speed for ignition (parameter 668).
5. Operating phases (phase 40...64): Read-in speed or setting of the speed curve above the
maximum speed in operation (parameter 669.1).
84 # Curve slope actuators
Check speed differential between the curvepoints and the modulating operating ramp setting
Bit 0 (parameter 544).
VSD: Curve too steep in terms of ramp speed
Valency 1 1. Modulating operating ramp 32 seconds
263/283

Error
code
seconds)
seconds)
seconds)
→ Between the ignition point (P0) and the low-fire point (P1), the speed change in modulating
mode may be a maximum of 40%, independent of the LMV26 / LMV36 ramp.
4. Setting of the VSD ramp must be about 20% shorter than the ramps in the LMV26 / LMV36
(parameters 522 and 523)
Check position differential between the curvepoints and the modulating operating ramp setting
(parameter 544).
Bit 1 The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 31° (15° for SQM33.6 and 9° for
Fuel actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 2..3 SQM33.7) between 2 curve points in modulating mode.
The slope of the curve may be a maximum position change of 62° (30° for SQM33.6 and 18° for
SQM33.7) between 2 curve points in modulating mode.
(parameter 544).
Air actuator: Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 4..7 SQM33.7) between 2 curve points in modulating mode.
85 # Referencing error ones actuators
Referencing of fuel actuator not successful.
Reference point could not be reached.
0 Referencing error of fuel actuator 1. Check the setting of the actuator type (parameter 613.0 or 614)
2. Check to see if actuators have been mixed up
3. Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded
Referencing of air actuator not successful
Reference point could not be reached.
1 Referencing error of air actuator 1. Check the setting of the actuator type (parameter 613.1)
2. Check to see if actuators have been mixed up
3. Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded
264/283

Error
code
Bit 7 Parameterization of an actuator (e.g. the reference position) has been changed.
Referencing error due to parameter change
Valency  128 To trigger new referencing, this error is set
86 # Error fuel actuator
Target position could not be reached within the required tolerance band.
0 Position error
 Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded.
Bit 0 Line interruption detected at actuator’s terminals.
Line interruption
Valency 1  Check wiring (voltage X54 across pin 5 or 6 and pin 2 >0.5 V).
(parameter 544).
Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency 8 SQM33.7) between 2 curve points in modulating mode.
Actuator was overloaded or mechanically twisted.
Bit 4 1. Check the setting of the actuator type (parameter 613.0 or 614)
Step deviation in comparison with last referencing
Valency  16 2. Check to see if the actuator is blocked somewhere along its working range.
3. Check to see if the torque is sufficient for the application.
87 # Error air actuator
Target position could not be reached within the required tolerance band.
0 Position error
 Check to see if actuator is locked or overloaded.
Bit 0 Line interruption detected at actuator’s terminals.
Line interruption
Valency 1  Check wiring (voltage X53 across pin 5 or 6 and pin 2 >0.5 V).
(parameter 544).
Curve too steep in terms of ramp rate
Valency  8 SQM33.7) between 2 curve points in modulating mode.
Actuator was overloaded or mechanically twisted.
Bit 4 1. Check the setting of the actuator type (parameter 613.1)
Sectional deviation in comparison with last referencing
Valency  16 2. Check to see if the actuator is blocked somewhere along its working range.
3. Check to see if the torque is sufficient for the application.
90 # Internal error LMV26 / LMV36
91 # Internal error LMV26 / LMV36
265/283

Error
code
93 # Error flame signal acquisition
Short-circuit at QRB
3 Short-circuit of sensor 1. Check wiring.
2. Flame detector possibly fault.
3 Ignition transformer
4 Fuel valve V1
External power supply NO contact Check wiring
5 Fuel valve V2
6 Fuel valve V3
Test the contacts:
3 Ignition transformer 1. LMV26 / LMV36 connected to power: Fan output must be dead.
4 Fuel valve V1 2. Disconnect power: Disconnect fan. No resistive connection between fan output and neutral
Relay contacts have welded
5 Fuel valve V2 conductor allowed.
6 Fuel valve V3 If one of the 2 tests fails, release the LMV26 / LMV36 since contact have definitively welded and
safety can no longer be ensured.
Test the contacts:
1. LMV26 / LMV36 connected to power: Fan output must be dead.
Safety relay contacts have welded or external power supply 2. Disconnect power: Disconnect fan. No resistive connection between fan output and neutral
0
fed to safety relay conductor allowed.
If one of the 2 tests fails, release the LMV26 / LMV36 since contacts have definitively welded and
safety can no longer be ensured.
2 Safety valve
4 Fuel valve V1 Relay does not pull in Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
5 Fuel valve V2
6 Fuel valve V3
99 # Internal error relay control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Make a reset. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Software version V03.10: If error C:99 D:3 occurs during standardization of the VSD, deactivate
3 Internal error relay control
temporarily function Alarm in case of start prevention (parameter 210 = 0, when using a release
contact) or interrupt the load controller-ON signal
100 # Internal error relay control Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
105 # Internal error contact sampling
0 Pressure switch-min Can be caused by capacitive loads or supply of DC voltage to the mains voltage inputs. The
1 Pressure switch-max / POC diagnostic code indicates the input where the problem occurred
266/283

Error
code
2 Pressure switch valve proving
/ Fuel selection Fuel 0 / Reset
3 Air pressure switch
4 Fuel selection Fuel 1 / Load
controller OPEN
5 Load controller ON/OFF
controller CLOSED
7 Safety loop / Burner flange
8 Safety valve
10 Fuel valve V1
11 Fuel valve V2
12 Fuel valve V3
13 Fuel selection Fuel 1 / Reset
106 # Internal error contact request Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
0 Pressure switch-min
1 Pressure switch-max / POC
controller OPEN
controller CLOSED
8 Safety valve
10 Fuel valve V1
11 Fuel valve V2
12 Fuel valve V3
267/283

Error
code
controller OPEN
controller CLOSED
8 Safety valve
10 Fuel valve V1
11 Fuel valve V2
12 Fuel valve V3
controller OPEN
controller CLOSED
8 Safety valve
10 Fuel valve V1
11 Fuel valve V2
12 Fuel valve V3
110 # Internal error voltage monitor test Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Mains voltage to low
111 # Power failure
Exchange ratio diagnostics code  voltage value (120 V: 0.843 / 230 V: 1,683)
112 0 Mains voltage recovery Error code for triggering a reset on power restoration (no error)
113 # Internal error mains voltage supervision Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
115 # Internal error system counter
116 0 Designed life time exceeded (250´000 startups) Warning threshold has been reached. The LMV26 / LMV36 should be replaced
268/283

Error
code
Life time exceeded
117 0 Switch-off threshold has been reached
Operation no longer allowed
Too many disturbance pulses at the fuel meters input
120 0 Interrupt limitation fuel meter input
 Improve EMC
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. Restore the parameter set, if error occurs
121 # Internal error EEPROM access
repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 /
125 # Internal error EEPROM read access
LMV36
126 # Internal error EEPROM write access
LMV36
Internal error EEPROM access - synchronization during
128 0 Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
initialization
Internal error EEPROM access – command Make a reset, repeat last parameterization / check. If error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 /
129 #
synchronization LMV36
130 # Internal error EEPROM access - timeout
LMV36
131 # Internal error EEPROM access - page on abort
LMV36
132 # Internal error EEPROM register initialization Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
133 # Internal error EEPROM access – Request synchronization
LMV36
LMV36
LMV36
136 # Restore
Restore of a backup has been started (no error)
1 Restore started
New LMV36 require resetting following restore!
for further diagnostic codes for error code 136, refer to For measures, refer to error code 137
269/283

Error
code
error code 137
137 # Internal error – backup / restore
Restore – ok, but backup < data set of current LMV26 /
157 (-99) Restore successful, but backup data record is smaller than in the current LMV26 / LMV36
LMV36
239 (-17) Backup – storage of backup in AZL2 faulty Reset and repeat backup
240 (-16) Restore – no backup in AZL2 No backup stored in AZL2
241 (-15) Restore – abortion due to unsuitable product no. (ASN) Backup has an unsuitable product no. (ASN) and must not be loaded on the LMV26 / LMV36
242 (-14) Backup – backup made is inconsistent Backup is faulty and cannot be transferred back
243 (-13) Backup – data comparison between µCs faulty Reset and repeat backup
244 (-12) Backup data are incompatible Backup data are incompatible with the current software version, restore not possible
245 (-11) Access error to parameter Restore_Complete Reset and repeat backup
246 (-10) Restore – timeout when storing in EEPROM Reset and repeat backup
247 (-9) Data received are inconsistent Backup data record invalid, restore not possible
248 (-8) Restore cannot at present be made Reset and repeat backup
249 (-7) Restore – abortion due to unsuitable burner identification Backup has an unsuitable burner identification and must not be transferred to the LMV26 / LMV36
250 (-6) Backup – CRC of one page is not correct Backup data record invalid, restore not possible
251 (-5) Backup – burner identification is not defined Define burner identification and repeat backup
252 (-4) After restore, pages still on ABORT Reset and repeat backup
253 (-3) Restore cannot at present be made Reset and repeat backup
254 (-2) Abortion due to transmission error Reset and repeat backup
Make a reset, check the connections and repeat backup / restore
255 (-1) Abortion due to timeout during backup / restore
In case of repeated backup timeout, the AZL2 does not yet support backup functionality
146 # Timeout building automation interface Refer to Modbus User Documentation (A7541)
1 Modbus timeout
2 eBus timeout
150 # TÜV test
1 (-1) Invalid phase TÜV test may only be started in phase 60 (operation)
2 (-2) TÜV test default output too low TÜV test default output must not be smaller than the lower output limit
3 (-3) TÜV test default output too high TÜV test default output must not be greater than the upper output limit
4 (-4) Manual interruption No error: Manual abortion of TÜV test by user
No loss of flame after shutdown of fuel valves
1. Check to see if there is extraneous light
5 (-5) TÜV test timeout
2. Check wiring to see if there is a short-circuit
3. Check to see if valve is leaking
1. Check wiring of analog trim specification to see if there is an open-circuit / loose contact
154 # Trim function: Invalid analog value 2. Check the process date of the read-in trim specification
(parameter 916; 4 mA = -15% / 12 mA = 0% / 20 mA = 15%)
270/283

Error
code
1 Start prevention
2 Warning message (trim function temporarily deactivated)
The curve setting of the VSD / PWM fan must include a reserve for the set trim range.
155 # Trim function: Invalid curve setting VSD / PWM fan ((Minimum value curve + negative trim range)  curve point  (maximum value curve -
positive trim range))
The curvepoint of the VSD curve is below the permissible minimum value
1..9 Minimum value VSD curve fall below
(diagnostic code = curvepoint number; e.g. 1 = P1)
The curvepoint of the VSD curve is above the permissible maximum value
21..29 Maximum value VSD curve exceeded
Fuel 1: The curvepoint of the VSD curve is below the permissible minimum value
41..49 Fuel 1: Minimum value VSD curve fall below
Fuel 1: The curvepoint of the VSD curve is above the permissible maximum value
61..69 Fuel 1: Maximum value VSD curve exceeded
Warning message!
Trim function is in limitation for too long (parameter 535; 916 < 531 or 916 >
156 # Trim function: Maximum time for range limit exceeded
532).This can be an indication that the trim function or the VSD curve is set
incorrectly.
0 Trim function at lower limit
1 Trim function at upper limit
10 Fuel 1: Trim function at lower limit
11 Fuel 1: Trim function at upper limit
157 # Trim function: Analog input test Test value of the analog input is outside the tolerance range
1. Check whether a current setting of 12 mA is present in standby.
0 Analog value standby
2. Check parameter 916 (permissible value range -1...+1%).
1. Check whether a current setting of 4 mA is present in prepurging.
1 Analog value prepurging
2. Check parameter 916 (permissible value range -16...-14%).
165 # Internal error
166 0 Internal error watchdog reset
167 # Manual locking LMV26 / LMV36 has been manually locked (no error)
1 Manual locking by contact
2 Manual locking by AZL2
3 Manual locking by PC software ACS410
Manual locking by the AZL2 During a curve adjustment via the AZL2, the timeout for menu operation has elapsed (setting via
8
Timeout / communication breakdown parameter 127), or communication between the LMV26 / LMV36 and the AZL2 has broken down
Manual locking by the PC software ACS410 During a curve adjustment via the ACS410, communication between the LMV26 / LMV36 and the
9
Communication breakdown ACS410 was interrupted for more than 30 seconds
33 Manual locking by the PC software ACS410 Via PC software ACS410, a reset attempt was made with an error-free LMV26 / LMV36.
271/283

Error
code
Test of lockout
168 # Internal error management Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
200 OFF # LMV26 / LMV36 error-free No error
201 OFF Start prevention due to unparameterized LMV26 / LMV36
UPr0 or # Prevention of startup Go to error history, entry 702, for initial cause of the error with shutdown in connection with the first
OFF UPr1 curve settings
Bit 0
No operating mode selected
Valency 1
Bit 1
No fuel train defined
Valency 2..3
Bit 2
No curves defined
Valency 4..7
Carry out speed standardization.
Bit 3
Standardized speed undefined If no speed signal is present in pneumatic operation, the parameters 667, 668, 669.0 / 669.1 must
Valency 8..15
be set to invalid to switch off the start prevention.
Bit 4
Backup / restore was not possible
Valency 16..31
202 # Internal error operating mode selection Redefine the operating mode (parameter 201)
Redefine the operating mode (parameter 201).
203 # Internal error
Make a reset; if error occurs repeatedly, replace the LMV26 / LMV36
204 Phase number Program stop Program stop is active (no error)
206 0 Inadmissible combination of units (LMV26 / LMV36 – AZL2)
207 # Version compatibility LMV26 / LMV36 – AZL2
0 LMV26 / LMV36 version too old
1 AZL2 version too old
Selected operation mode is not released for the LMV26 /
210 0 Select a released operation mode for the LMV26 / LMV36
LMV36
242 # Invalid parameterization
0 Invalid setting parameter 277 Set parameter 277 to a valid value
1 Invalid setting parameter 377 Set parameter 377 to a valid value
272/283

Error
code
273/283

31 Revision history of LMV26 / LMV36
Software changes Software version V03.10
 Optimization: If power supply fails during the restore process, the data set can be
repaired by starting a new restore process (since the backup / restore option is not
yet available with V03.00 because there is no suitable AZL2, this effect cannot
occur)
 Optimization: If the analog input is interrupted, error C:60 (no valid load controller
source) is canceled or reset when Default output low-fire is parameterized
 Optimization: When making a reset via the AZL2, an incomplete reset occurred in
very rare cases (display showed RESEt, but reset was not triggered)
 Optimization: The time of 0.2 seconds ascertained by the loss-of-flame test was too
long
 Optimization: No continuous purging with the LMV26 (in prepurge / ignition position)
during the gas shortage waiting time when using a VSD and valve proving via gas
pressure switch-min
 Optimization: With fuel changeover, error codes C:85 / C:86 do not occur any more
 Optimization: Reduced detection of undervoltage when fan motor is started in phase
22
 Optimization: Better overview through text changes of groups 200 = PAr0, 300 =
PAr1 and 600 = ACtr on the parameter menu (initially PArA), and hiding of unused
parameters after selection of fuel train / operating mode
 Optimization: Control of the fan output during standardization (standby) for using a
release contact via an external relay at the fan’s output
 Optimization: Curve setting invalid (OFF UPr) after new / further standardization
 Optimization: To shorten the startup time, there is no referencing when postpurging
is aborted via load controller-ON (direct start)
 Automatic return travel of the SQN1 at the lower internal stop
 Parameter on Siemens level
Longer ignition off time during the first safety time (increased from 0.4 to 0.6
seconds) to prevent wrong error diagnostics in connection with QRA2 (C:7 in place
of C:2)
 Parameter at the Siemens level:
Readjustment of threshold for detection of interruption based on operation with
AGM60 and 2 fuel actuators
 Creation of new parameter sets for the burner output test based on V01.04
(otherwise, due to a restore process with old data sets during the burner output test,
parameter changes at the safety limit thermostat level might be overwritten again)
Software version V03.30
 Extension: Display of intensity of flame when setting the curves

 Optimization: Display and diagnostics of changing start preventions
 Optimization: No unplausible relay setpoint (error C:99 D:3) when starting
standardization, alarm in case of start prevention and load controller-ON signal
 Optimization: No VSD standardization with pneumatic air-fuel ratio control
 Optimization: Referencing in connection with direction of rotation Right and home
position 90°
 Extension: Separate pressure switch valve proving via X5-02 (pressure switch-max
/ POC)
274/283

31 Revision history of LMV26 / LMV36 17.12.2018
 Extension: Supports SQM33.6 or SQM33.7

 Extension: Postpurging in the lockout position
 Optimization: Shutdown of VSD control when burner flange / safety loop is open
 Optimization: Standstill supervision of the VSD can be switched off in standby mode
 Extension: No flame at the end of safety time repetition counter, adjustable air
pressure failure (OEM), heavy oil direct start (SO)
 Extension: Air pressure supervision in operation with pneumatic ratio control can be
switched off (OEM)
 Extension: VSD ramp time increased to 40 seconds
 Extension: Modbus data points
127 = Fuel 0 operating mode (parameter 201)
128 = Fuel 1 operating mode (parameter 301)
 Optimization: No locking with C:75 via asynchronous load controller source

 Extension: Support of PWM fans and symmetrical feedback
 Extension: Increase in the maximum speed to 14000 rpm
 Extension: Additional monitoring of the minimum prepurge speed, maximum ignition
speed and minimum speed / maximum speed during operation
 Extension: Increased flexibility when setting the curve (gradient VSD curve)
 Extension: Operating modes for G / Gp2 with mechanical ratio control (air actuator
only)
 Extension: Trim function for e.g. O2 or temperature
 Extension: Separate phase for running the fan to ignition speed, postpurge speed or
standby speed, as well as increased speed tolerance outside operation
 Extension: Speed-dependent air pressure switch
 Extension: Increase in the flame sensitivity
 Extension: Gas pressure switch-min positioned after the fuel valves (CSA 149.3)
 Extension: Immediate lockout in the event of inadequate air supply (UL 795 / EN
676)
 Optimization: No repetition during successive error messages
 Extension: At the end of the speed standardization, the speed must be <10%
 Extension: Modbus data points
140 = fuel 0 operating mode (parameter 201)
141 = fuel 1 operating mode (parameter 301)
142 = meter for function Revert to Pilot
144 = lower range limit trim function
145 = upper range limit trim function
146 = lower range limit trim function fuel 1
147 = upper range limit trim function fuel 1
148 = input value analog input trim function
149 = current trim impact
150 = absolute speed
151 = standardized mains voltage (conversion required)
275/283

27.08.2009
Index
Error safety shutdown ............... 185
A
Fault status messages .............. 184
Acquisition of speed
Faults number ........................... 193
Fan forced travel ........................ 139
Flame intensity .......................... 193
Speed extended supervision .. 141
Fuel-air ratio curves .......... 212, 225
ACS410 .......................................... 169
Flame intensity ........................ 234
Display / diagnostics ................. 41
G mod ............................. 215, 217
Actuators ....................................... 123
G mod pneu .................... 216, 223
Angles definition...................... 123
Gp1 mod ......................... 215, 217
Direction of rotation ................ 128
Gp1 mod pneu ................ 216, 223
Error detection band ............... 131
Gp2 mod ................. 215, 217, 223
Forced travel ............................ 131
Gp2 mod pneu ........................ 216
Function principle ................... 123
Initial commissioning ............... 212
Line interruption detection ..... 131
Interpolation ............................ 224
Mixup protection ...................... 132
Lo 2-stage ............... 228, 229, 233
Proposal - implementation .... 132
Lo 3-stage ............... 228, 229, 233
Position .................................... 129
Lo mod ............................ 215, 217
Referencing .............................. 124
General information................... 185
Reference run ......................... 126
Heating engineer’s password
AGM60 .............................................. 98
change ...................................... 199
Cable lengths ............................... 39
Identification date ...................... 188
Connecting cable to LMV26 /
Identification number ................. 188
LMV36 ......................................... 99
Index parameter, direct display . 207
Continuous operation .................. 25
Info / service mode .................... 184
Cross-sectional areas .................. 39
Info level .................................... 187
Dimensions .................................. 41
Info level end ............................. 191
Electrical connections .................. 15
Info value display ...................... 188
Electrical connections of actuators
Level assignment ...................... 186
..................................................... 39
LMV26 / LMV36 operation ........ 181
Environmental conditions ............ 39
Manual control........................... 175
Extra fuel selector ........................ 25
Manual lockout .......................... 174
Fuel actuators - electrical
Meaning of symbol .................... 174
connection ................................... 24
Menu operation timeout ............ 175
Fuel changeover .......................... 25
Menu-driven operation .............. 186
Function description .................... 24
No parameter index, no direct
Installation notes .......................... 14
display ....................................... 205
Technical data ............................. 37
No parameters index / direct display .................. 20
Terminal output inputs ................. 38
Normal display .......................... 181
Terminal output outputs ............... 38
OEM’s password change .......... 200
Type summary ............................. 26
Operating ................................. 173
With LMV26 / LMV36 and 1 fuel
Operating position display ......... 183
actuator ...................................... 98
Parameter index, no direct display
With LMV26 / LMV36 and 2 fuel
.................................................. 209
actuators .................................... 98
Parameter level ......................... 194
AZL2
Parameter level structure .......... 202
Backup ....................................... 176
Parameter level use .................. 201
Burner identification ................... 189
Password entry ......................... 195
Burner identification entry .......... 197
Phase display list ...................... 182
Buttons description .................... 173
Program phase display - running
Display / diagnostics ................. 41
time ........................................... 181
Display brightness ..................... 174
Program phases display............ 181
Display description..................... 173
Reset ......................................... 184
Error display .............................. 184
Restore...................................... 176
Error history ............................... 193
276/283

Safety loop ................................ 185 Curve definition...................... 119
Service level .............................. 192 Modulation range ................... 121
Service level end ....................... 193 Operating position ................. 120
Service value display................. 193 Output adjustment ................. 120
Shutdown display ...................... 181 Traveling speed ..................... 119
Special functions ....................... 174 Operating position ................... 116
Standby mode display ............... 181 Outside - operating position ... 112
Startup display........................... 181 Postpurging.............................. 113
Startup number resettable ......... 190 Prepurging................................ 113
Startup number total .................. 191 Running position ..................... 116
Startup prevention ..................... 185 Setting notes ............................ 122
Traveling speed ............... 112, 115
B
Error history .................................. 170
Burner Identification..................... 165
Error classes ............................ 170
C Error history makeup .............. 171
Connection diagram ..................... 162
F
D Fan control..................................... 133
Digital inputs Connection terminals .............. 157
Fuel selection ............................ 57 PWM fan .................................. 157
Gas pressure switch for valve VSD ......................................... 157
proving ....................................... 49 Control ...................................... 147
Setting the time for checking the EMC ........................................... 147
pressure switch ......................... 52 Function principle.................... 133
X3-02 ........................................... 48 Parameter settings .................. 142
X3-03 pin 1 / 2 ............................ 47 PWM fan special conditions ... 148
X3-04 pin 1 / 2 ............................ 46 Ramp time ................................ 136
X5-01 ........................................... 50 Safe separation ........................ 135
X5-02 ........................................... 53 Speed acquisition .................... 137
X5-03 pin 1 ................................. 47 Proximity switch .................... 137
X5-03 Pin 2 ................................. 47 Speed control ........................... 139
X5-03 Pin 3 ................................. 47 Speed standardization ............ 143
Digital outputs Speed supervision ................... 140
X3-05 pin 1 ................................. 59 Trim function .............................. 150
X3-05 pin 2 ................................. 59 External tests ........................... 155
X3-05 pin 3 ................................. 59 VSD / PWM fan activation ....... 133
X4-02 ........................................... 60 X64 pin 3 ................................... 134
X6-03 ........................................... 64 X74 pin 3 ................................... 134
X7-01 ........................................... 61 Flame detector
X7-02 ........................................... 61 Flame detection sensitivity ....... 45
X8-02 ........................................... 61 Flame detectors
X8-04 pin 2 ................................. 64 Extraneous light......................... 44
Dimensions ....................................... 40 Flame intensity........................... 45
Display / diagnostics ...................... 41 Loss of flame.............................. 44
No flame at the end of safety time ................
E
Supervision ................................ 45
Electronic fuel-air ratio control ... 112
Fuel meter input ............................ 160
Curves definition ..................... 114
Configuration ........................... 160
General ..................................... 112
Pulses per volume unit.......... 160
Home position ......................... 112
Reading ................................... 160
Ignition ..................................... 113
Resetting................................. 160
Max. curve slope ..................... 115
Types ...................................... 160
Min. / Max. output .................... 118
Fuel throughput ....................... 161
Modulating operation .............. 113
Configuration ......................... 161
Modulation range .................... 117
Reading out ............................ 161
Multistage operation ............... 119
Fuel selector
277/283

17.12.2018
Type summary ............................. 26 Deleting curves ....................... 103
Function description .......................... 22
P
Europe ......................................... 23
Program sequence
General information ..................... 23
Alarm .......................................... 73
I Continuous fan .......................... 80
Internal diagram ............................ 162 Gas shortage program.............. 78
Ionization probe Low-fire shutdown .................... 80
Technical data ............................. 31 Manual lockout .......................... 71
Phase 00 .................................... 71
L
Phase 02 .................................... 71
Lifecycle function ......................... 172
Postpurging ............................... 82
LMV26 / LMV36 ................................ 42
Program stop ............................. 79
Cable lengths ............................... 29
Repetition counter .................... 75
Connections of actuators ............. 29
Reset .......................................... 71
Cross-sectional areas .................. 29
Special functions ...................... 71
Digital inputs .............................. 46
Start without prepurging .......... 77
Digital outputs............................ 59
Startup........................................ 74
Dimensions .................................. 40
Time parameters ....................... 65
Electrical connections .................. 14
TÜV test...................................... 81
Error code list .......................... 256
X5-01........................................... 70
Flame detectors ......................... 43
X5-02........................................... 69
Fuel trains .................................. 83
PWM fan
Function description .................... 22
Acquisition of speed .................. 149
Inputs / outputs .......................... 42
Characteristics .......................... 148
Parameter list ........................... 235
Program sequence .................... 65 Q
Sequence diagrams ................... 89 QRA
Technical data ............................. 27 Technical data ............................. 33
Terminal loading inputs................ 27 QRB
Terminal loading outputs ............. 28 Technical data ............................. 34
Type summary ............................. 26 QRB4
X74 pin 3 ..................................... 28 Technical data ............................. 35
Load controller connection .......... 104 QRC
Emergency operation .............. 111 Technical data ............................. 36
Load controller sources .......... 110
S
Manual control ......................... 111
Safety functions
Manual output .......................... 108
Forced intermittent operation ...... 79
Output - curve settings ........... 108
Safety notes ....................................... 9
Threshold - modulating operation
AGM60
................................................... 109
Electrical connections ............... 14
Threshold - multistage operation
Mounting notes .......................... 12
................................................... 109
Commissioning notes .................. 17
X5-03 pin 1 ................................ 104
Disposal notes............................. 21
X64 pin 1 ................................... 109
Flame detectors
X64 pin 2 ................................... 109
Electrical connection ................. 17
Load output ................................... 158
Installation notes ......................... 13
2-stage operation ..................... 159
Life cycle ..................................... 21
3-stage operation ..................... 159
LMV26 / LMV36
Modulating operation .............. 159
Electrical connections ............... 14
Safe separation ........................ 158
Mounting notes .......................... 11
M Mounting notes............................ 11
Make of structure .............................. 22 Service notes .............................. 21
Setting notes ............................... 19
O
Standards and certificates .......... 20
Operating mode selection ............ 100
Warning notes ............................... 9
278/283

X56 Superposed system connection .. 166
Connection BC interface via Building automation functions
integrated RJ jack ................ 16 ................................................... 166
Sequence diagrams General information................. 166
G.................................................. 90 Modbus ..................................... 168
G mod ......................................... 90
T
G mod pneu ............................... 90
Technical data ................................... 27
Gp1 ............................................. 91
AGV50 from AZL2 to BC interface
Gp1 mod ..................................... 91
..................................................... 30
Gp1 mod pneu ........................... 91
Environmental conditions............. 30
Gp2 ............................................. 92
Flame detectors ........................... 31
Gp2 mod ..................................... 92
Trim function
Gp2 mod pneu ........................... 92
Internal check optional ............... 153
Legend........................................ 95
Settings / mode of operation ...... 151
Lo ................................................ 93
Type summary .................................. 26
Lo 2-stage .................................. 93
Lo 3-stage .................................. 93 X
Lo mod ....................................... 93 X53 / X54 ........................................ 123
LoGp ........................................... 94 X74 pin 3 ........................................ 158
LoGp 2 stage.............................. 94 X75 pin 1 ........................................ 160
LoGp mod .................................. 94 X75 pin 2 ........................................ 160
279/283

17.12.2018
32 List of figures
Figure 1: LMV26 / LMV36: Note on mounting ............................................................... 11
Figure 2: AGM60: Note for mounting ............................................................................ 12
Figure 3: AGM60: Mounting method ............................................................................. 12
Figure 4: LMV26 / LMV36 electrical connection ........................................................... 14
Figure 5: AGM60 electrical connection ......................................................................... 15
Figure 6: AGM60 lateral connecting area ..................................................................... 15
Figure 7: Connection interface OCI410 on the BC interface ......................................... 16
Figure 8: System structure ............................................................................................ 22
Figure 9: Connection of fuel actuators .......................................................................... 24
Figure 10: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Fuel changeover .......................................... 25
Figure 11: AGM60 extra fuel selector ........................................................................... 25
Figure 12: Ionization input at AC 230 V ........................................................................ 32
Figure 13: Measuring circuit for ionization probe .......................................................... 32
Figure 14: Measuring circuit QRA ................................................................................. 33
Figure 15: QRB1/QRB3 input at AC 230 V ................................................................... 34
Figure 16: Measuring circuit QRC ................................................................................. 36
Figure 17: Dimensions of the LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................................. 40
Figure 18: Dimensions of the AGM60 ........................................................................... 41
Figure 19: Flame signal input X10-05 ........................................................................... 42
Figure 20: Flame signal input X10-06 ........................................................................... 42
Figure 21: Safety loop (optional pressure switch-max) X3-04 ...................................... 46
Figure 22: Burner flange X3-03 ..................................................................................... 47
Figure 23: Inputs for external load controller ON / OFF X5-03 ..................................... 47
Figure 24: Inputs external load controller Open / Close X5-03 ..................................... 47
Figure 25: Air pressure switch X3-02 ............................................................................ 48
Figure 26: Gas pressure switch-min /oil pressure switch -min X5-01 ........................... 50
Figure 27: LMV26 / LMV36: Gas pressure switch-max / oil pressure switch-max or POC
X5-02 ..................................................................................................................... 53
Figure 28: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Gas pressure switch-max /oil pressure switch-
max or POC X5-02 ................................................................................................ 53
Figure 29: Additional speed-dependent air pressure switch ......................................... 56
Figure 30: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Type of pushbutton ...................................... 58
Figure 31: Output alarm X3-05 ..................................................................................... 59
Figure 32: Fan motor contactor X3-05 .......................................................................... 59
Figure 33: Fan continuous purging X3-05 ..................................................................... 59
Figure 34: Output ignition X4-02 ................................................................................... 60
280/283

32 List of figures 17.12.2018
Figure 35: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V1 X8-02 ............................................... 61
Figure 36: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V1 X8-02 .......................... 61
Figure 37: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V2 X7-01 ............................................... 62
Figure 38: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V2 X7-01 .......................... 62
Figure 39: LMV26 / LMV36: Output fuel valve V3 / pilot valve X7-02 ............................ 63
Figure 40: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output fuel valve V3 / pilot valve X7-02 ....... 63
Figure 41: LMV26 / LMV36: Output safety valve / magnetic clutch X6-03 .................... 64
Figure 42: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Output safety valve / magnetic clutch X6-03 64
Figure 43: Output for indication of operation X8-04 ....................................................... 64
Figure 44: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60: Type of pushbutton (X8-04 pin 1 or X9-04 pin
2) ............................................................................................................................72
Figure 45: Message in the case of program stop .......................................................... 79
Figure 46: Continuous fan ............................................................................................. 80
Figure 47: Application example of postpurging in the lockout position with fan but
without VSD ............................................................................................................ 82
Figure 48: Application example of postpurging in the lockout position with fan and VSD
release contact ....................................................................................................... 82
Figure 49: Gas direct ignition ......................................................................................... 83
Figure 50: Gas pilot ignition 1 ........................................................................................ 83
Figure 51: Gas pilot ignition 2 ........................................................................................ 83
Figure 52: Gas – fuel valve control ................................................................................ 84
Figure 53: Light oil direct ignition, multistage ................................................................ 85
Figure 54: Light oil direct ignition, 2-stage ..................................................................... 85
Figure 55: Light oil direct ignition, 3-stage ..................................................................... 85
Figure 56: Light oil direct ignition, modulating ............................................................... 86
Figure 57: Light oil ignition, modulating ......................................................................... 86
Figure 58: Light oil direct ignition - fuel valve control ..................................................... 86
Figure 59: Dual fuel burner gas / light oil with gas pilot ignition ..................................... 87
Figure 60: Light oil with gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control ........................................ 87
Figure 61: Light oil direct ignition, modulating, without shutdown facility for adjustable
head ....................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 62: Light oil direct ignition, modulating, with shutdown facility for adjustable head
............................................................................................................................... 88
Figure 63: Gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control ............................................................ 88
Figure 64: Dual fuel burner gas / light oil with gas pilot ignition with 2 fuel valves ........ 89
Figure 65: Light oil – gas pilot ignition – fuel valve control ........................................... 89
Figure 66: Program for gas direct ignition (G), (G mod), (G mod pneu) ........................ 90
Figure 67: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp1), (Gp1 mod), (Gp1 mod pneu) .............. 91
Figure 68: Program for gas pilot ignition (Gp2), (Gp2 mod), (Gp2 mod pneu) .............. 92
281/283

17.12.2018
Figure 69: Program for light oil direct ignition (Lo), (Lo mod), (Lo 2-stage), (Lo 3-stage)
............................................................................................................................... 93
Figure 70: Program light pilot ignition «LoGp» «LoGp mod» «LoGp 2 stage» ............. 94
Figure 71: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and one fuel actuator .................................... 98
Figure 72: LMV26 / LMV36 with AGM60 and two fuel actuator .................................... 98
Figure 73: Modulating operation X5-03 ....................................................................... 104
Figure 74: 2-stage operation X5-03 ............................................................................ 105
Figure 75: 3-stage operation X5-03 ............................................................................ 105
Figure 76: Shifting multistage operation (OPEN pin 3 / CLOSE pin 2) ....................... 105
Figure 77: External load controller via analog input X64 pin 1 / X64 pin 2 ................. 109
Figure 78: Definition of curves .................................................................................... 114
Figure 79: Restriction of modulation range ................................................................. 117
Figure 80: Adjustment of output .................................................................................. 120
Figure 81: Fuel actuator (X54) .................................................................................... 123
Figure 82: Air actuator (X53) ....................................................................................... 123
Figure 83: Angle definitions with SQM33 .................................................................... 127
Figure 84: Direction of rotation (example SQM3) ....................................................... 128
Figure 85: Function principle of fan control ................................................................. 133
Figure 86: Connection of VSD to the LMV26 / LMV36 ............................................... 134
Figure 87: Power output .............................................................................................. 135
Figure 88: Sensor disk ................................................................................................ 137
Figure 89: Speed sensor ............................................................................................. 138
Figure 90: Extended speed supervision ...................................................................... 141
Figure 91: Setting range trim limits ............................................................................. 151
Figure 92: Trim supervision with PLC ......................................................................... 155
Figure 93: VSD connection X74 .................................................................................. 157
Figure 94: PWM fan X74 ............................................................................................. 157
Figure 95: PWM fan X64 ............................................................................................. 157
Figure 96: Power output .............................................................................................. 158
Figure 97: Fuel meter input X75 ................................................................................. 160
Figure 98: Inputs and outputs ..................................................................................... 162
Figure 99: Switching between 2 ration control curves ................................................ 163
Figure 100: Gas / biogas burners ............................................................................... 164
Figure 101: Connection via COM X92 to superposed systems .................................. 166
Figure 102: Communication with display / BC interface (RJ11 jack) (X56)................. 169
Figure 103: Display input / BC interface (RJ11 jack) X56 ........................................... 169
Figure 104: Description of unit/display and buttons .................................................... 173
Figure 105: Meaning of display ................................................................................... 174
282/283

32 List of figures 17.12.2018
Figure 106: Assignment of levels ................................................................................ 186
Figure 107: Info level ................................................................................................... 187
Figure 108: Service level ............................................................................................. 192
Figure 109: Structure of parameter levels ................................................................... 202
Figure 110: Setting the curvepoints ............................................................................. 220
Figure 111: Changing several curvepoints .................................................................. 227
Siemens AG Building Technologies © 2018 Siemens AG Building Technologies

Berliner Ring 23 Subject to change!
D-76437 Rastatt
Tel. 0049-7222-598-279
Fax 0049-7222-598-269
www.siemens.com
283/283

17.12.2018

LMV26.300A2: Basic Documentation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMV26.300A2: Basic Documentation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMV26.300A2: Basic Documentation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LMV26 AGM60

Environmental Product Declaration LMV2 / LMV3 .................................................. E7541

Environmental Product Declaration AGM60 ........................................................... E7547

Installation and Operating Instructions PC Software ACS410 ................................. J7352

Data Sheet LMV26 / LMV36 / AGM60 .................................................................... N7547

Product Range Overview LMV2 / LMV3 ................................................................. Q7541

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

2 System structure/function description...................................................... 22

3 Type summary ............................................................................................. 26

4 Technical data.............................................................................................. 27

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

6 Display and diagnostics ..............................................................................41

7 Basic unit LMV26 / LMV36...........................................................................42

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

8 AGM60 .......................................................................................................... 98

9 Selection of operating mode .................................................................... 100

10 Connection to load controllers ................................................................ 104

11 Electronic fuel-air ratio control ................................................................ 112

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

12 Actuators X53 / X54 ...................................................................................123

13 Fan control .................................................................................................133

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

14 Load output X74 pin 3 ............................................................................... 158

16 Connection and internal diagram ............................................................ 162

17 Special feature: Burner identification...................................................... 165

18 Connection to superposed systems........................................................ 166

19 PC software ACS410 ................................................................................. 169

20 Error history ............................................................................................... 170

21 Lifecycle function ...................................................................................... 172

22 Safety notes on use of the AZL2 .............................................................. 172

23 Operating via AZL2.................................................................................... 173

24 Operation of LMV26 / LMV36 via the AZL2.............................................. 181

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

30 Error code list (all LMV2 types / LMV3 types)............................................256

31 Revision history of LMV26 / LMV36 .........................................................274

32 List of figures .............................................................................................280

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Additional safety notes contained in other chapters of this document must be

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

1.2.1 LMV26 / LMV36

Notes on mounting 217

Additional mounting 6,5

Figure 1: LMV26 / LMV36: Note on mounting

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Mounting method Screwed On a DIN rail

Mounting on DIN rails requires a

If the unit is screwed on, following must be observed:

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

The reason being the following:

1.4 Electrical connections of LMV26 / LMV36 and

1.4.1 LMV26 / LMV36

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Mains voltage FELV

Lateral connecting area

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en

Connection interface OCI410 on the BC interface

Building Technologies Basic Documentation LMV26 / LMV36 CC1P7547en